Chapter 4 · Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa · Complete

The Earth Kasiṇa

This page carries Ru-Yi's translation of the Visuddhimagga's chapter 4, Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa ("The Description of the Earth Kasiṇa") — the treatise's foundational how-to chapter for the actual development of concentration, using the earth kasiṇa as its full worked example. Everything this chapter establishes in detail — finding a suitable dwelling, cutting off minor impediments, making the kasiṇa disc, the two kinds of meditative sign, and the full method through all four (or five) jhānas — will be assumed, and only briefly cross-referenced, by every later chapter treating one of the remaining thirty-nine meditation subjects.

Status: chapter 4 complete — all four (and five) jhānas fully translated Translator: Ru-Yi Meditation Center Source: Vism IV, Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa (VRI/CST numbering) Author: Bhadantācariya Buddhaghosa, 5th c. CE

Translation Method

The Pāli source is the Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana (Sixth Council) romanized edition maintained by the Vipassana Research Institute (VRI, tipitaka.org), cross-checked against the Pali Text Society's Rhys Davids edition (1920–21) as digitized on GRETIL. The VRI text is used under its stated terms — freely available for non-commercial use, with attribution to the Vipassana Research Institute — while the GRETIL/PTS digitization, which carries its own CC BY-SA licence, is used only to verify readings, never copied.

The English translation is Ru-Yi's own, made directly from the Pāli. No existing English translation of the Visuddhimagga — including Bhikkhu Ñāṇamoli's copyrighted The Path of Purification — is consulted, paraphrased, or used as a guide for wording or structure. Reading notes are grounded only in the text's own internal citations and in the general, uncontested conventions of the Pāli commentarial (aṭṭhakathā) genre — never in a modern scholar's specific interpretation. Each translated passage carries a short vocabulary list for readers learning Pāli alongside the text, continuing the same format established on this site's earlier Visuddhimagga chapters.

Choosing a Dwelling

The chapter opens by returning to chapter 3's own summary phrase — "having abandoned a dwelling unsuited to the development of concentration" — and works out the practical logistics of staying near enough to a teacher to resolve doubts quickly, before turning to its detailed catalogue of what makes a dwelling actually unsuitable.

Pali Source

Idāni yaṃ vuttaṃ "samādhibhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ vihāraṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre viharantenā"ti ettha yassa tāvācariyena saddhiṃ ekavihāre vasato phāsu hoti, tena tattheva kammaṭṭhānaṃ parisodhentena vasitabbaṃ. Sace tattha phāsu na hoti, yo añño gāvute vā aḍḍhayojane vā yojanamattepi vā sappāyo vihāro hoti, tattha vasitabbaṃ. Evañhi sati kammaṭṭhānassa kismiñcideva ṭhāne sandehe vā satisammose vā jāte kālasseva vihāre vattaṃ katvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā bhattakiccapariyosāneyeva ācariyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā taṃdivasamācariyassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā dutiyadivase ācariyaṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā akilamantoyeva attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ āgantuṃ sakkhissati. Yo pana yojanappamāṇepi phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ na labhati, tena kammaṭṭhāne sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā suvisuddhaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ katvā dūrampi gantvā samādhibhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ vihāraṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre vihātabbaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Now, as to what was said, "who, having abandoned a dwelling unsuited to the development of concentration, dwells in a suitable one" — herein, first, for one to whom it is comfortable to dwell in the same monastery as his teacher, he should dwell right there, clarifying his meditation subject as needed. If it is not comfortable there, he should dwell in whatever other suitable monastery there is, whether a quarter-league away, half a league, or even a full league. For thus, when doubt or a lapse of memory about the meditation subject arises at some point, having performed the customary duties at his own monastery early, and having walked for alms along the way, right at the end of the meal he will be able to go to the teacher's dwelling-place, clarify the meditation subject in the teacher's presence that very day, and, on the next day, having paid respects to the teacher and set out, walk for alms along the way, and, without becoming exhausted, return to his own dwelling-place. But whoever cannot find a comfortable place even within a league's distance — he should first resolve every knotty point in the meditation subject, make it thoroughly clear and ready to be recalled at will, and then, even going far, having abandoned a dwelling unsuited to the development of concentration, should dwell in a suitable one.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The graduated distances here — same monastery, then a quarter-league, half a league, a full league, and finally "even going far" — trace a single continuous logic: proximity to a teacher is valuable precisely because it lets doubts get resolved quickly, and the text calculates the exact round trip (morning duties, the walk, alms along the way, arriving right at the end of the meal, the return the next day) that keeps a whole day of practice from being lost to a single clarifying visit. Only once a teacher is genuinely out of practical reach does the chapter allow a different solution — front-loading all the preparation before departure, so no doubt remains that would require a return trip at all.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
gāvuta

a quarter-league, roughly two miles — one of the graduated distances offered here for a suitably close dwelling, alongside aḍḍhayojana (half a league) and yojana (a full league).

gaṇṭhiṭṭhāna

a knotty point, a difficulty — gaṇṭhi (a knot) + ṭhāna (a place, point); the specific kind of unresolved doubt that must be cleared up before departing if no teacher will be reachable afterward.

āvajjanapaṭibaddha

bound to attention, recallable at will — āvajjana (adverting, turning the mind to) + paṭibaddha (bound, connected); describes a meditation subject mastered thoroughly enough to be brought to mind on demand, without external help.

The Eighteen Faults of an Unsuitable Dwelling

The chapter now catalogues, one by one, the eighteen specific ways a dwelling can undermine concentration — most of them not exotic dangers but the ordinary friction of crowds, chores, disputes, and demands on a monk's time, illustrated throughout with vivid, often wry vignettes of exactly how each nuisance actually plays out.

Pali Source

Tattha ananurūpo nāma aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgato. Tatrime aṭṭhārasa dosā — mahattaṃ, navattaṃ, jiṇṇattaṃ, panthanissitattaṃ, soṇḍī, paṇṇaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ, patthanīyatā, nagarasannissitatā, dārusannissitatā, khettasannissitatā, visabhāgānaṃ puggalānaṃ atthitā, paṭṭanasannissitatā, paccantasannissitatā, rajjasīmasannissitatā, asappāyatā, kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābhoti imesaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena dosena samannāgato ananurūpo nāma. Na tattha vihātabbaṃ.

Kasmā? Mahāvihāre tāva bahū nānāchandā sannipatanti, te aññamaññaṃ paṭiviruddhatāya vattaṃ na karonti. Bodhiyaṅgaṇādīni asammaṭṭhāneva honti. Anupaṭṭhāpitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ gocaragāme piṇḍāya carissāmīti pattacīvaramādāya nikkhanto sace passati vattaṃ vā akataṃ pānīyaghaṭaṃ vā rittaṃ, athānena vattaṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ. Akaronto vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Karontassa kālo atikkamati, atidivā paviṭṭho niṭṭhitāya bhikkhāya kiñci na labhati. Paṭisallānagatopi sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhūnaṃ uccāsaddena saṅghakammehi ca vikkhipati. Yattha pana sabbaṃ vattaṃ katameva hoti, avasesāpi ca saṅghaṭṭanā natthi. Evarūpe mahāvihārepi vihātabbaṃ.

Navavihāre bahu navakammaṃ hoti, akarontaṃ ujjhāyanti. Yattha pana bhikkhū evaṃ vadanti "āyasmā yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karotu, mayaṃ navakammaṃ karissāmā"ti evarūpe vihātabbaṃ.

Jiṇṇavihāre pana bahu paṭijaggitabbaṃ hoti, antamaso attano senāsanamattampi appaṭijaggantaṃ ujjhāyanti, paṭijaggantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati.

Panthanissite mahāpathavihāre rattindivaṃ āgantukā sannipatanti. Vikāle āgatānaṃ attano senāsanaṃ datvā rukkhamūle vā pāsāṇapiṭṭhe vā vasitabbaṃ hoti. Punadivasepi evamevāti kammaṭṭhānassa okāso na hoti. Yattha pana evarūpo āgantukasambādho na hoti, tattha vihātabbaṃ.

Soṇḍī nāma pāsāṇapokkharaṇī hoti, tattha pānīyatthaṃ mahājano samosarati, nagaravāsīnaṃ rājakulūpakattherānaṃ antevāsikā rajanakammatthāya āgacchanti, tesaṃ bhājanadārudoṇikādīni pucchantānaṃ asuke ca asuke ca ṭhāneti dassetabbāni honti, evaṃ sabbakālampi niccabyāvaṭo hoti.

Yattha nānāvidhaṃ sākapaṇṇaṃ hoti, tatthassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā divāvihāraṃ nisinnassāpi santike sākahārikā gāyamānā paṇṇaṃ uccinantiyo visabhāgasaddasaṅghaṭṭanena kammaṭṭhānantarāyaṃ karonti.

Yattha pana nānāvidhā mālāgacchā supupphitā honti, tatrāpi tādisoyeva upaddavo.

Yattha nānāvidhaṃ ambajambupanasādiphalaṃ hoti, tattha phalatthikā āgantvā yācanti, adentassa kujjhanti, balakkārena vā gaṇhanti, sāyanhasamaye vihāramajjhe caṅkamantena te disvā "kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā"ti vuttā yathāruci akkosanti. Avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.

Patthanīye pana leṇasammate dakkhiṇagirihatthikucchicetiyagiricittalapabbatasadise vihāre viharantaṃ "ayamarahā"ti sambhāvetvā vanditukāmā manussā samantā osaranti, tenassa na phāsu hoti, yassa pana taṃ sappāyaṃ hoti, tena divā aññatra gantvā rattiṃ vasitabbaṃ.

Nagarasannissite visabhāgārammaṇāni āpāthamāgacchanti, kumbhadāsiyopi ghaṭehi nighaṃsantiyo gacchanti, okkamitvā maggaṃ na denti, issaramanussāpi vihāramajjhe sāṇiṃ parikkhipitvā nisīdanti.

Dārusannissaye pana yattha kaṭṭhāni ca dabbupakaraṇarukkhā ca santi, tattha kaṭṭhahārikā pubbe vuttasākapupphahārikā viya aphāsuṃ karonti, vihāre rukkhā santi, te chinditvā gharāni karissāmāti manussā āgantvā chindanti. Sace sāyanhasamayaṃ padhānagharā nikkhamitvā vihāramajjhe caṅkamanto te disvā "kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā"ti vadati, yathāruci akkosanti, avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.

Yo pana khettasannissito hoti samantā khettehi parivārito, tattha manussā vihāramajjheyeva khalaṃ katvā dhaññaṃ maddanti, pamukhesu sayanti, aññampi bahuṃ aphāsuṃ karonti. Yatrāpi mahāsaṅghabhogo hoti, ārāmikā kulānaṃ gāvo rundhanti, udakavāraṃ paṭisedhenti, manussā vīhisīsaṃ gahetvā "passatha tumhākaṃ ārāmikānaṃ kamma"nti saṅghassa dassenti. Tena tena kāraṇena rājarājamahāmattānaṃ gharadvāraṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, ayampi khettasannissiteneva saṅgahito.

Visabhāgānaṃ puggalānaṃ atthitāti yattha aññamaññaṃ visabhāgaverī bhikkhū viharanti, ye kalahaṃ karontā "mā, bhante, evaṃ karothā"ti vāriyamānā "etassa paṃsukūlikassa āgatakālato paṭṭhāya naṭṭhāmhā"ti vattāro bhavanti.

Yopi udakapaṭṭanaṃ vā thalapaṭṭanaṃ vā nissito hoti, tattha abhiṇhaṃ nāvāhi ca satthehi ca āgatamanussā "okāsaṃ detha, pānīyaṃ detha, loṇaṃ dethā"ti ghaṭṭayantā aphāsuṃ karonti.

Paccantasannissite pana manussā buddhādīsu appasannā honti.

Rajjasīmasannissite rājabhayaṃ hoti. Tañhi padesaṃ eko rājā "na mayhaṃ vase vattatī"ti paharati, itaropi "na mayhaṃ vase vattatī"ti. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu kadāci imassa rañño vijite vicarati, kadāci etassa. Atha naṃ "carapuriso aya"nti maññamānā anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti.

Asappāyatāti visabhāgarūpādiārammaṇasamosaraṇena vā amanussapariggahitatāya vā asappāyatā. Tatridaṃ vatthu. Eko kira thero araññe vasati. Athassa ekā yakkhinī paṇṇasāladvāre ṭhatvā gāyi. So nikkhamitvā dvāre aṭṭhāsi, sā gantvā caṅkamanasīse gāyi. Thero caṅkamanasīsaṃ agamāsi. Sā sataporise papāte ṭhatvā gāyi. Thero paṭinivatti. Atha naṃ sā vegenāgantvā gahetvā "mayā, bhante, na eko na dve tumhādisā khāditā"ti āha.

Kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābhoti yattha na sakkā hoti ācariyaṃ vā ācariyasamaṃ vā upajjhāyaṃ vā upajjhāyasamaṃ vā kalyāṇamittaṃ laddhuṃ. Tattha so kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābho mahādosoyevāti imesaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgato ananurūpoti veditabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu —

Mahāvāsaṃ navāvāsaṃ, jarāvāsañca panthaniṃ;
Soṇḍiṃ paṇṇañca pupphañca, phalaṃ patthitameva ca.

Nagaraṃ dārunā khettaṃ, visabhāgena paṭṭanaṃ;
Paccantasīmāsappāyaṃ, yattha mitto na labbhati.

Aṭṭhārasetāni ṭhānāni, iti viññāya paṇḍito;
Ārakā parivajjeyya, maggaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ yathāti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "unsuitable" means possessing any one of eighteen faults. Here are these eighteen faults: largeness, newness, dilapidation, proximity to a road, a rock-pool, edible leaves, flowers, fruit, being much sought-after, proximity to a city, proximity to timber, proximity to fields, the presence of incompatible people, proximity to a port, proximity to the frontier, proximity to a border between kingdoms, unsuitability, and lack of good friends — possessing any one of these eighteen faults is called "unsuitable." One should not dwell there.

Why? In a large monastery, first, many people of various inclinations gather; being at odds with one another, they do not perform the customary duties. The Bodhi-tree courtyard and the like remain unswept. Drinking water and washing water are not kept prepared. There, one who has set out with bowl and robe, thinking "I shall walk for alms in the resort village," if he sees a duty undone, or a water-pot empty, must then perform that duty, and set out the water. Not doing so, he commits an offense of wrongdoing for breach of duty. For one who does perform it, the time passes; entering too late in the day, once the almsgiving is finished, he gets nothing. Even one gone into seclusion is distracted by the loud noise of novices and young monks, and by the business of formal Sangha acts. But where all the duties are already performed, and there is no further disturbance either — in such a large monastery too, one may dwell.

In a new monastery, there is much construction work; they complain about one who does not join in it. But where the monks say, "let the venerable one do the recluse's work as he finds comfortable; we will do the construction work" — in such a place one may dwell.

In a dilapidated monastery, much needs repair; they complain about one who does not repair even so much as his own lodging; and for one who does repair it, the meditation subject declines.

In a monastery situated on a main road, visitors gather day and night. Having given one's own lodging to those who arrive at an improper hour, one must dwell at the foot of a tree or on a rock surface. The next day it is just the same again; so there is no opportunity for the meditation subject. But where there is no such crowding of visitors, there one may dwell.

A "rock-pool" is a natural stone reservoir; there, crowds of people gather for water; the pupils of city-dwelling elders connected to the royal household come there for dyeing work; when they ask about vessels, wood, troughs, and the like, these must be shown to them, "they are in such-and-such a place" — thus, at all times, one is constantly occupied.

Where various kinds of edible leafy vegetables grow, even for one sitting there for his daytime rest, having taken up his meditation subject, women gathering leaves nearby, singing as they pick, create a danger to his meditation subject through the disturbance of discordant noise.

And where various kinds of flowering shrubs are in full bloom, there too is the very same kind of trouble.

Where various kinds of fruit — mango, rose-apple, jackfruit, and the like — grow, those wanting fruit come and beg for it; if refused, they become angry, or take it by force; and if, walking in the monastery in the evening, one sees them and says, "why do you laypeople act this way?" — being addressed, they abuse him as they please. They may even conspire to drive him from his dwelling.

But as for what is "much sought-after": one dwelling in a monastery renowned as a cave-retreat, such as Dakkhiṇagiri, Hatthikucchi, Cetiyagiri, or Cittalapabbata, is thought by people, "this one must be an arahant," and they flock there from all around wishing to pay respects; because of this, there is no comfort for him. But for one to whom that itself is suitable, he should go elsewhere by day and dwell there only at night.

In a monastery near a city, incongruous objects come into range; water-carrying slave-women, too, go about jostling with their pots, not stepping aside to give way; and important people, too, set up a screen in the midst of the monastery and sit there.

As for what is near timber: where there is firewood and trees suitable for building material, wood-gatherers, like the vegetable- and flower-gatherers already mentioned, cause discomfort; if there are trees in the monastery, people come and cut them down, "we will make houses from them." If, in the evening, having come out from his meditation cell and walking in the midst of the monastery, he sees them and says, "why do you laypeople act this way?" — they abuse him as they please, and may even conspire to drive him from his dwelling.

But whatever is near fields, surrounded all around by fields — there, people make a threshing-floor right in the middle of the monastery and thresh their grain, sleep in the porches, and cause much other discomfort. And where the Sangha holds a large agricultural estate, the monastery attendants impound the cattle of local families, and cut off their water allotment; the people, taking a handful of rice-heads, show them to the Sangha, "see what your attendants have done." For this or that reason, one must go to the doors of kings and great ministers; this too is included under "near fields."

"The presence of incompatible people" means where monks hostile to one another dwell — who, when quarreling, if restrained with "venerable sirs, do not act this way," become ones who say, "we have been ruined ever since this rag-robe-wearer arrived."

And whatever is situated near a water-port or a land-port — there, people constantly arriving by boat and by caravan, pressing for things, saying "give us space, give us water, give us salt," cause discomfort.

But near the frontier, people have little confidence in the Buddha and the rest.

Near a border between kingdoms, there is danger from kings. For one king attacks that region, "it does not stand under my control"; and the other likewise, "it does not stand under my control." There, this monk sometimes wanders in one king's territory, sometimes in the other's. Then, thinking of him, "this one is a spy," they bring him to ruin and calamity.

"Unsuitability" means unsuitability either through the influx of incongruous sights and other objects, or through being possessed by non-human beings. Here is the story. It is said that a certain elder dwelt in the forest. Then a female spirit stood at the door of his leaf-hut and sang. He came out and stood at the door; she went and sang at the head of the walking-path. The elder went to the head of the walking-path. She stood on a cliff a hundred men high and sang. The elder turned back. Then she, coming swiftly, seized him and said: "Venerable sir, I have devoured not one, not two, of your kind."

"Lack of good friends" means where it is not possible to obtain, as a good friend, one's teacher or the equal of a teacher, or one's preceptor or the equal of a preceptor. There, that lack of good friends is indeed a great fault. Possessing any one of these eighteen faults should be understood as "unsuitable." And this was said in the commentaries —

A large dwelling, a new dwelling, an old dwelling, and one by a road; a rock-pool, leaves, flowers, and fruit, and one much sought-after too;

a city, one near timber, a field, one with incompatible people, a port; the frontier, a border, the unsuitable, and where a friend cannot be found.

Having thus known these eighteen places, the wise one should avoid them from afar, just as one avoids a dangerous road.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

What is striking about this catalogue, read straight through, is how few of the eighteen faults are exotic dangers — only the "unsuitable" category's haunted forest and the border-region's espionage risk involve anything dramatic. Nearly everything else is ordinary social friction: chores left undone, construction noise, quarreling neighbors, importunate fruit-beggars, thirsty travelers, curious pilgrims. The chapter is telling a meditator that the greatest threat to concentration is rarely a crisis — it is the accumulated weight of small, everyday claims on his time and attention, each individually reasonable, together fatal to sustained practice.

Nearly every fault, moreover, comes with its own escape clause: a large monastery is fine once its duties are already handled; a new one is fine if the other monks release him from construction work; even the famous cave-retreats are fine for someone who can slip away by day and return only at night. The eighteen faults are not eighteen absolute prohibitions but eighteen questions a meditator must actually go and answer about a specific place — the text refuses to let the list become a rule applied from a distance.

The yakkhinī story is worth noting for what it does and doesn't resolve: the elder tries three times to physically retreat from the sound of her voice — from his hut's door, to the head of his walking-path, and finally turning back from the cliff's edge — and the story simply ends with her chilling admission, offering no account of his fate or of how such a situation should be handled. It functions purely as a warning example under "unsuitability through possession by non-human beings," illustrating the category rather than resolving into a lesson about what to do next.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
soṇḍī

a natural rock-pool or stone reservoir — one of the eighteen faults, since such a water source draws crowds and, in this account, apprentice dyers seeking supplies.

patthanīya

much sought-after, desirable — patthanā (longing, aspiration) + iya; describes a monastery so renowned for its meditators that visiting pilgrims become an impediment in their own right.

ārāmika

a monastery attendant or steward — ārāma (monastery, park) + ika; the lay or novice staff whose management of Sangha-owned agricultural land is named as a specific source of local resentment.

yakkhinī

a female yakkha, a class of powerful (and often dangerous) non-human spirit — the antagonist of this section's cautionary story, illustrating "unsuitability through possession by non-human beings."

carapurisa

a spy, a secret agent — cara (moving about, roaming) + purisa (a man); the accusation a monk risks in a contested border region, simply for having crossed between two kings' territories.

A Suitable Dwelling, and Minor Impediments

Where the previous section catalogued eighteen ways a dwelling can go wrong, this one gives the single positive formula for a dwelling that goes right — the Buddha's own five-factor description — before briefly listing the small everyday chores that should be cleared away before beginning.

Pali Source

Yo pana gocaragāmato nātidūranāccāsannatādīhi pañcahaṅgehi samannāgato, ayaṃ anurūpo nāma. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā — "kathañca, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ nātidūraṃ hoti nāccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasireneva uppajjanti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā. Tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā, te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati 'idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ imassa ko attho'ti, tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttānīkaronti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhaṭṭhāniyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hotī"ti (a. ni. 10.11).

Ayaṃ "samādhibhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ vihāraṃ pahāya anurūpe vihāre viharantenā"ti ettha vitthāro.

Khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvāti evaṃ patirūpe vihāre viharantena yepissa te honti khuddakapalibodhā, tepi upacchinditabbā. Seyyathidaṃ, dīghāni kesanakhalomāni chinditabbāni. Jiṇṇacīvaresu daḷhīkammaṃ vā tunnakammaṃ vā kātabbaṃ. Kiliṭṭhāni vā rajitabbāni. Sace patte malaṃ hoti, patto pacitabbo. Mañcapīṭhādīni sodhetabbānīti. "Ayaṃ khuddakapalibodhupacchedaṃ katvā"ti ettha vitthāro.

Ru-Yi Translation

But whatever is endowed with the five factors — not too far and not too near the resort village, and the rest — this is called "suitable." For this was said by the Blessed One: "And how, monks, is a dwelling endowed with five factors? Herein, monks, a dwelling is not too far and not too near, endowed with a good path for going and coming; by day not crowded, by night quiet, with little noise; with little contact from gadflies, mosquitoes, wind, sun, and creeping things; and, for one dwelling in that dwelling, robes, almsfood, lodging, and medicinal requisites for the sick arise without difficulty. And in that dwelling there live elder monks of great learning, versed in the tradition, who bear the Dhamma, bear the Vinaya, bear the summaries; approaching them from time to time, he asks and questions them, 'Venerable sir, how is this? What is the meaning of this?' And those venerable ones reveal to him what is hidden, make clear what is obscure, and dispel his doubt in the many matters that are grounds for doubt. Thus, monks, is a dwelling endowed with five factors" (A.N. 10.11).

This is the detailed treatment, in connection with "who, having abandoned a dwelling unsuited to the development of concentration, dwells in a suitable one."

"Having cut off minor impediments": for one dwelling in a fitting monastery in this way, whatever minor impediments he may have should also be cut off. Namely: long hair, nails, and body-hair should be cut. Reinforcement or mending work should be done on worn-out robes; or, if soiled, they should be dyed. If there is corrosion on the bowl, it should be fired. The bed, chair, and the like should be cleaned. This is the detailed treatment, in connection with "having cut off minor impediments."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The Buddha's own five-factor formula is worth comparing against the eighteen faults just catalogued: where the eighteen faults were largely social — crowds, disputes, demands — the five positive factors are a mix of the practical (a good path, freedom from insects and weather) and, crucially, the intellectual: the last and longest factor is simply having learned elders nearby who can resolve doubts. A dwelling can satisfy every physical convenience and still fail this formula if no one there can actually answer a question about the Dhamma or Vinaya.

The minor impediments are deliberately mundane — a haircut, mended robes, a cleaned bowl — but the logic is the same one that ran through the ten impediments in the previous chapter: anything still nagging at attention, however trivial, is a seed for the mind to wander back to mid-session. Clearing it away first is not fastidiousness for its own sake but a last practical sweep before the real work begins.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
gocaragāma

a resort village, the village a monk walks to for alms — gocara (pasture, feeding-ground) + gāma (village); the fixed point of reference for judging a dwelling's distance in both the eighteen faults and this five-factor formula.

mātikādhara

one who bears the [Pātimokkha] summaries — mātikā (a summary, table of headings) + dhara (bearer); one of four kinds of scriptural mastery named among the qualities of the resident elders a suitable dwelling should have.

khuddakapalibodha

a minor impediment — khuddaka (small, minor) + palibodha (impediment, the same term from chapter 3's ten major impediments); the small household chores addressed here before beginning formal practice.

Making the Kasiṇa Disc

The chapter now turns to its actual subject — the step-by-step development of the earth kasiṇa — opening with the canonical formula for taking up the sign in earth, a story of a monk for whom no artificial disc was even needed, and then the detailed practical instructions for making one for everybody else.

Pali Source

Idāni sabbaṃ bhāvanāvidhānaṃ aparihāpentena bhāvetabboti ettha ayaṃ pathavīkasiṇaṃ ādiṃ katvā sabbakammaṭṭhānavasena vitthārakathā hoti.

Evaṃ upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhena hi bhikkhunā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkantena bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvā pavivitte okāse sukhanisinnena katāya vā akatāya vā pathaviyā nimittaṃ gaṇhitabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ —

"Pathavīkasiṇaṃ uggaṇhanto pathaviyaṃ nimittaṃ gaṇhāti kate vā akate vā sāntake, no anantake, sakoṭiye, no akoṭiye, savaṭṭume, no avaṭṭume, sapariyante, no apariyante, suppamatte vā sarāvamatte vā. So taṃ nimittaṃ suggahitaṃ karoti, sūpadhāritaṃ upadhāreti, suvavatthitaṃ vavatthapeti. So taṃ nimittaṃ suggahitaṃ katvā sūpadhāritaṃ upadhāretvā suvavatthitaṃ vavatthapetvā ānisaṃsadassāvī ratanasaññī hutvā cittīkāraṃ upaṭṭhapetvā sampiyāyamāno tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ upanibandhati 'addhā imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇamhā muccissāmī'ti. So vivicceva kāmehi … pe … paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatī"ti.

Tattha yena atītabhavepi sāsane vā isipabbajjāya vā pabbajitvā pathavīkasiṇe catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattitapubbāni, evarūpassa puññavato upanissayasampannassa akatāya pathaviyā kasitaṭṭhāne vā khalamaṇḍale vā nimittaṃ uppajjati, mallakattherassa viya. Tassa kirāyasmato kasitaṭṭhānaṃ olokentassa taṃṭhānappamāṇameva nimittaṃ udapādi. So taṃ vaḍḍhetvā pañcakajjhānāni nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā arahattaṃ pāpuṇi.

Yo panevaṃ akatādhikāro hoti, tena ācariyasantike uggahitakammaṭṭhānavidhānaṃ avirādhetvā cattāro kasiṇadose pariharantena kasiṇaṃ kātabbaṃ. Nīlapītalohitaodātasambhedavasena hi cattāro pathavīkasiṇadosā. Tasmā nīlādivaṇṇaṃ mattikaṃ aggahetvā gaṅgāvahe mattikāsadisāya aruṇavaṇṇāya mattikāya kasiṇaṃ kātabbaṃ. Tañca kho vihāramajjhe sāmaṇerādīnaṃ sañcaraṇaṭṭhāne na kātabbaṃ. Vihārapaccante pana paṭicchannaṭṭhāne pabbhāre vā paṇṇasālāya vā saṃhārimaṃ vā tatraṭṭhakaṃ vā kātabbaṃ. Tatra saṃhārimaṃ catūsu daṇḍakesu pilotikaṃ vā cammaṃ vā kaṭasārakaṃ vā bandhitvā tattha apanītatiṇamūlasakkharakathalikāya sumadditāya mattikāya vuttappamāṇaṃ vaṭṭaṃ limpetvā kātabbaṃ. Taṃ parikammakāle bhūmiyaṃ attharitvā oloketabbaṃ. Tatraṭṭhakaṃ bhūmiyaṃ padumakaṇṇikākārena khāṇuke ākoṭetvā vallīhi vinandhitvā kātabbaṃ. Yadi sā mattikā nappahoti, adho aññaṃ pakkhipitvā uparibhāge suparisodhitāya aruṇavaṇṇāya mattikāya vidatthicaturaṅgulavitthāraṃ vaṭṭaṃ kātabbaṃ. Etadeva hi pamāṇaṃ sandhāya "suppamattaṃ vā sarāvamattaṃ vā"ti vuttaṃ. "Sāntake no anantake"tiādi panassa paricchedatthāya vuttaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Now, as to "should be developed without letting the whole procedure of development lapse" — herein, this is the detailed discourse by way of all the meditation subjects, beginning with the earth kasiṇa.

For by a monk who has thus cut off his minor impediments, having returned from his almsround after the meal, having dispelled drowsiness from the meal, and sitting comfortably in a secluded place, the sign should be taken up in earth, whether prepared or unprepared. For this was said —

"One learning the earth kasiṇa takes up the sign in earth, whether prepared or unprepared, bounded, not unbounded, having an edge, not without an edge, having a raised rim, not without a raised rim, having a limit, not unlimited, the size of a winnowing basket or the size of a saucer. He makes that sign well grasped, well retained, well defined. Having made that sign well grasped, well retained, and well defined, seeing its benefit, perceiving it as a jewel, having established a sense of high regard, and cherishing it, he binds his mind to that object, thinking, 'surely by this practice I shall be freed from old age and death.' He, quite secluded from sense pleasures ... attains and dwells in the first jhāna."

Herein, for one who, in a past existence too, having gone forth either in the Dispensation or as an ascetic renunciant, had previously produced the four or five jhānas by means of the earth kasiṇa — for such a meritorious person, accomplished in supporting condition, the sign arises in unprepared earth, at a plowed spot or a threshing-floor, as in the case of the Elder Mallaka. It is said that, for that venerable one, looking at a plowed spot, the sign arose of exactly that spot's size. He, having expanded it, produced the five jhānas, established insight with that jhāna as its proximate cause, and attained arahantship.

But whoever has made no such prior effort, he, without deviating from the procedure of the meditation subject learned in the teacher's presence, avoiding the four faults of a kasiṇa, should make a kasiṇa. For the four faults of the earth kasiṇa are by way of admixture with blue, yellow, red, or white. Therefore, not taking clay of a blue or other such color, one should make the kasiṇa from clay of a dawn-color, resembling the clay carried down by the Ganges. And it should not be made in the middle of the monastery, in a place where novices and the like pass through. But at the edge of the monastery, in a hidden place — either under a rock overhang or in a leaf-hut — it should be made either portable or fixed in place. Herein, the portable one should be made by binding a rag, a hide, or a woven mat onto four sticks, and, on that, smearing a disc of the stated size, made from well-kneaded clay with grass-roots, gravel, and pebbles removed. At the time of preliminary practice, it should be spread on the ground and looked at. The fixed one should be made in the ground by driving in stakes in the shape of a lotus-pericarp and binding them together with creepers. If that clay does not suffice, other clay should be put in below, and, on top, a disc a span and four finger-widths across should be made from thoroughly purified dawn-colored clay. For it is with reference to precisely this measure that it was said, "the size of a winnowing basket or the size of a saucer." And "bounded, not unbounded" and the rest were said for the purpose of delimiting it.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The Elder Mallaka's story is placed immediately after the canonical formula for a reason: it establishes, before the ordinary procedure is even described, that the elaborate disc-making instructions to follow are a scaffold for beginners, not the meditation itself. For someone who has genuinely practiced this before — in this life or, as the text takes for granted, in a past one — a plowed field or a threshing-floor is already enough; the sign simply arises. The detailed instructions that follow are what the rest of us, "who have made no such prior effort," actually need.

The specification of the four faults as admixture with blue, yellow, red, or white is a small but telling piece of craftsmanship logic: the kasiṇa's whole purpose is to give the mind a perfectly neutral, uniform object, so any color contamination — however faint — becomes a distraction the eye will keep tripping over. The same logic runs through the instructions to remove even grass-roots, gravel, and pebbles from the clay: nothing about the physical disc should be interesting enough, on its own terms, to hold attention past the point where the mind is meant to let go of it entirely.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
nimitta

a sign — the central technical term of this whole chapter, here referring first to the physical kasiṇa itself and, as practice deepens, to its increasingly refined mental counterparts.

upanissaya

a supporting condition, especially one carried over from a past life — upa (near) + nissaya (support, reliance); the technical basis for why some meditators, like the Elder Mallaka, need no artificial preparation at all.

aruṇavaṇṇā mattikā

dawn-colored clay — aruṇa (the reddish glow of dawn) + vaṇṇa (color) + mattikā (clay); the specific, carefully neutral hue prescribed for the kasiṇa disc, compared here to the silt of the Ganges.

vidatthicaturaṅgula

a span and four finger-widths — vidatthi (a span, roughly 9 inches) + catur (four) + aṅgula (a finger-width); the precise standard diameter given for the kasiṇa disc, glossing the canonical formula's looser "the size of a winnowing basket or a saucer."

Seat, Eyes, and the First Sign

With the disc made, the chapter turns to the meditator's own posture and the precise technique of looking at it — neither too intently nor too loosely — before describing the exact moment the "learning-sign" first arises, and how to protect and recover it afterward.

Pali Source

Tasmā evaṃ vuttappamāṇaparicchedaṃ katvā rukkhapāṇikā visabhāgavaṇṇaṃ samuṭṭhapeti. Tasmā taṃ aggahetvā pāsāṇapāṇikāya ghaṃsetvā samaṃ bherītalasadisaṃ katvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ sammajjitvā nhatvā āgantvā kasiṇamaṇḍalato aḍḍhateyyahatthantare padese paññatte vidatthicaturaṅgulapādake suatthate pīṭhe nisīditabbaṃ. Tato dūratare nisinnassa hi kasiṇaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, āsannatare kasiṇadosā paññāyanti. Uccatare nisinnena gīvaṃ onamitvā oloketabbaṃ hoti, nīcatare jaṇṇukāni rujanti. Tasmā vuttanayeneva nisīditvā "appassādā kāmā"tiādinā nayena kāmesu ādīnavaṃ paccavekkhitvā kāmanissaraṇe sabbadukkhasamatikkamupāyabhūte nekkhamme jātābhilāsena buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānussaraṇena pītipāmojjaṃ janayitvā "ayaṃ dāni sā sabbabuddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakehi paṭipannā nekkhammapaṭipadā"ti paṭipattiyā sañjātagāravena "addhā imāya paṭipadāya pavivekasukharasassa bhāgī bhavissāmī"ti ussāhaṃ janayitvā samena ākārena cakkhūni ummīletvā nimittaṃ gaṇhantena bhāvetabbaṃ.

Atiummīlayato hi cakkhu kilamati, maṇḍalañca ativibhūtaṃ hoti, tenassa nimittaṃ nuppajjati. Atimandaṃ ummīlayato maṇḍalamavibhūtaṃ hoti, cittañca līnaṃ hoti, evampi nimittaṃ nuppajjati. Tasmā ādāsatale mukhanimittadassinā viya samenākārena cakkhūni ummīletvā nimittaṃ gaṇhantena bhāvetabbaṃ, na vaṇṇo paccavekkhitabbo, na lakkhaṇaṃ manasikātabbaṃ. Apica vaṇṇaṃ amuñcitvā nissayasavaṇṇaṃ katvā ussadavasena paṇṇattidhamme cittaṃ paṭṭhapetvā manasi kātabbaṃ. Pathavī mahī, medinī, bhūmi, vasudhā, vasundharātiādīsu pathavīnāmesu yamicchati, yadassa saññānukūlaṃ hoti, taṃ vattabbaṃ. Apica pathavīti etadeva nāmaṃ pākaṭaṃ, tasmā pākaṭavaseneva "pathavī pathavī"ti bhāvetabbaṃ. Kālena ummīletvā kālena nimīletvā āvajjitabbaṃ. Yāva uggahanimittaṃ nuppajjati, tāva kālasatampi kālasahassampi tato bhiyyopi eteneva nayena bhāvetabbaṃ.

Tassevaṃ bhāvayato yadā nimīletvā āvajjantassa ummīlitakāle viya āpāthamāgacchati, tadā uggahanimittaṃ jātaṃ nāma hoti. Tassa jātakālato paṭṭhāya na tasmiṃ ṭhāne nisīditabbaṃ. Attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pavisitvā tattha nisinnena bhāvetabbaṃ. Pādadhovanapapañcaparihāratthaṃ panassa ekapaṭalikupāhanā ca kattaradaṇḍo ca icchitabbo. Athānena sace taruṇo samādhi kenacideva asappāyakāraṇena nassati, upāhanā āruyha kattaradaṇḍaṃ gahetvā taṃ ṭhānaṃ gantvā nimittaṃ ādāya āgantvā sukhanisinnena bhāvetabbaṃ, punappunaṃ samannāharitabbaṃ, takkāhataṃ vitakkāhataṃ kātabbaṃ. Tassevaṃ karontassa anukkamena nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanti, kilesā sannisīdanti, upacārasamādhinā cittaṃ samādhiyati, paṭibhāganimittaṃ uppajjati.

Ru-Yi Translation

Therefore, having made it delimited to the measure stated, if smoothed with a wooden trowel it produces a patchy color. Therefore, not using that, one should smooth it with a stone trowel, making it even, like the surface of a drum; and, having swept that place, and bathed, one should come and sit on a well-covered stool with legs a span and four finger-widths high, placed at a distance of two and a half cubits from the kasiṇa-disc. For one sitting farther than that, the kasiṇa does not appear clearly; sitting nearer, the faults of the kasiṇa become visible. Sitting too high, one must look down bending the neck; too low, the knees ache. Therefore, sitting in the manner stated, having reflected on the danger in sense-pleasures by the method beginning "sense-pleasures give little enjoyment," and, with a longing arisen for renunciation — the escape from sense-pleasures, the means of surmounting all suffering — having generated joy and gladness by recollecting the qualities of the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha, with reverence born from the thought "this, now, is that very path of renunciation practiced by all Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and noble disciples," and having generated enthusiasm with the thought "surely, by this practice, I shall share in the taste of the happiness of seclusion" — one should develop it, opening the eyes evenly and taking up the sign.

For one who opens the eyes too wide, the eyes grow tired, and the disc becomes overly distinct; because of this, the sign does not arise for him. For one who opens them too little, the disc is indistinct, and the mind becomes sluggish; in this way too, the sign does not arise. Therefore, just as one seeing the reflection of one's own face on the surface of a mirror, one should open the eyes evenly and take up the sign; the color should not be reflected upon, nor should its particular characteristic be attended to. Rather, without excluding the color — treating it as belonging to its physical basis, by way of its prominence — the mind should be established on the earth-element as a conceptual state, and it should be attended to. Among the names for earth — pathavī, mahī, medinī, bhūmi, vasudhā, vasundharā, and the rest — whichever one wishes, whichever is congenial to one's own perception, that should be used. But, indeed, "pathavī" is the most well-known of these names; therefore it should be developed simply by way of this well-known term, "earth, earth." It should be brought to mind, opening the eyes at one time and closing them at another. It should be developed in this same way a hundred times, a thousand times, even more than that, until the learning-sign arises.

For one developing it in this way, when, closing the eyes and adverting to it, it comes into range just as it does with the eyes open, then the learning-sign is said to have arisen. From the time it has arisen, one should no longer sit in that place. One should enter one's own dwelling-place and develop it sitting there. And, for the purpose of avoiding the delay of washing the feet, a single-soled sandal and a walking-staff should be desired. Then, if this young concentration should be lost through some unsuitable cause, one should put on the sandals, take the walking-staff, go to that place, take up the sign again, come back, and, sitting comfortably, develop it; it should be attended to again and again, worked over by reasoning and by thought. For one doing so, the hindrances are gradually suppressed, the defilements settle down, the mind becomes concentrated by access concentration, and the counterpart-sign arises.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The instructions for opening the eyes strike a balance the text describes almost as a physical rule rather than a matter of willpower: too wide and the eyes tire while the disc becomes garishly distinct, too narrow and both the disc and the mind grow dim. The mirror simile is precise about what this balance feels like — not effortful staring, but the same relaxed, natural attention one gives one's own reflection while checking one's face, an attention that takes in the whole image without straining after any single detail.

The instruction not to examine the color or dwell on the kasiṇa's particular characteristic, immediately followed by permission to use whichever of earth's many names feels most natural, shows the same object being approached from two directions at once: perceptually, one lets the disc simply be present without analyzing it, while conceptually, one is free to label it however suits one's own mind. Neither approach competes with the other — the visual sign and the verbal label work together to establish the same single object in the mind.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
nekkhamma

renunciation, the giving up of sense-pleasures — the mental preparation recommended immediately before each session of looking at the kasiṇa, framing the whole practice within the reflection already familiar from chapter 3's discussion of temperament.

paṇṇattidhamma

a conceptual state, a state that exists as a designation — paṇṇatti (a concept, a designation) + dhamma (state, phenomenon); the earth-kasiṇa-as-idea that the mind is meant to settle on, distinct from the raw visual patch of color.

uggahanimitta

the learning-sign, the acquired sign — uggaha (learning, taking up) + nimitta (sign); the first mental image of the kasiṇa, visible with the eyes closed but still carrying all the physical disc's own faults and imperfections.

ekapaṭalika-upāhana

a single-soled sandal — a specific, humble type of footwear recommended purely so a lapsed sign can be quickly recovered by returning to the original spot without the delay of washing dusty feet on return.

The Counterpart-Sign, and the Two Concentrations

This section carries what may be the most celebrated single passage in the entire Visuddhimagga — the description of the counterpart-sign that succeeds the learning-sign, likened to a moon emerging from behind clouds — followed by a precise technical account of exactly how access concentration differs from full absorption, and a final warning about how fragile a newly gained sign still is.

Pali Source

Tatrāyaṃ purimassa ca uggahanimittassa imassa ca viseso, uggahanimitte kasiṇadoso paññāyati, paṭibhāganimittaṃ thavikato nihatādāsamaṇḍalaṃ viya sudhotasaṅkhathālaṃ viya valāhakantarā nikkhantacandamaṇḍalaṃ viya meghamukhe balākā viya uggahanimittaṃ padāletvā nikkhantamiva tato sataguṇaṃ sahassaguṇaṃ suparisuddhaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tañca kho neva vaṇṇavantaṃ, na saṇṭhānavantaṃ. Yadi hi taṃ īdisaṃ bhaveyya, cakkhuviññeyyaṃ siyā oḷārikaṃ sammasanupagaṃ tilakkhaṇabbhāhataṃ, na panetaṃ tādisaṃ. Kevalañhi samādhilābhino upaṭṭhānākāramattaṃ saññajametanti.

Uppannakālato ca panassa paṭṭhāya nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva honti, kilesā sannisinnāva, upacārasamādhinā cittaṃ samāhitamevāti.

Duvidho hi samādhi upacārasamādhi ca appanāsamādhi ca. Dvīhākārehi cittaṃ samādhiyati upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā paṭilābhabhūmiyaṃ vā. Tattha upacārabhūmiyaṃ nīvaraṇappahānena cittaṃ samāhitaṃ hoti. Paṭilābhabhūmiyaṃ aṅgapātubhāvena.

Dvinnaṃ pana samādhīnaṃ idaṃ nānākāraṇaṃ, upacāre aṅgāni na thāmajātāni honti, aṅgānaṃ athāmajātattā, yathā nāma daharo kumārako ukkhipitvā ṭhapiyamāno punappunaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patati, evameva upacāre uppanne cittaṃ kālena nimittamārammaṇaṃ karoti, kālena bhavaṅgamotarati. Appanāyaṃ pana aṅgāni thāmajātāni honti, tesaṃ thāmajātattā, yathā nāma balavā puriso āsanā vuṭṭhāya divasampi tiṭṭheyya, evameva appanāsamādhimhi uppanne cittaṃ sakiṃ bhavaṅgavāraṃ chinditvā kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divasaṃ tiṭṭhati, kusalajavanapaṭipāṭivaseneva pavattatīti.

Tatra yadetaṃ upacārasamādhinā saddhiṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa uppādanaṃ nāma atidukkaraṃ. Tasmā sace teneva pallaṅkena taṃ nimittaṃ vaḍḍhetvā appanaṃ adhigantuṃ sakkoti, sundaraṃ. No ce sakkoti, athānena taṃ nimittaṃ appamattena cakkavattigabbho viya rakkhitabbaṃ. Evañhi —

Nimittaṃ rakkhato laddha-parihāni na vijjati;
Ārakkhamhi asantamhi, laddhaṃ laddhaṃ vinassati.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, this is the distinction between the earlier learning-sign and this one: in the learning-sign, the faults of the kasiṇa are visible; the counterpart-sign, however, appears as though it had burst forth, splitting open the learning-sign, and stands there a hundred times, a thousand times more thoroughly pure — like a mirror-disc drawn out of its pouch, like a well-polished conch-shell dish, like the moon's disc emerging from behind a cloud-bank, like cranes against a thundercloud. And yet it possesses neither color nor shape. For if it were such, it would be cognizable by the eye, gross, subject to comprehension by insight, and struck by the three characteristics — but it is not of that kind. For it is merely the mode of appearance to one who has attained concentration, born of perception.

And from the time it has arisen, the hindrances are indeed suppressed, the defilements have indeed settled down, and the mind is indeed concentrated by access concentration.

For concentration is twofold: access concentration and absorption concentration. The mind becomes concentrated in two ways: on the plane of access, or on the plane of attainment. Herein, on the plane of access, the mind is concentrated through the abandoning of the hindrances. On the plane of attainment, through the manifestation of the jhāna factors.

But this is the distinguishing feature of the two concentrations: in access, the factors have not become strong; and because the factors have not become strong, just as a young child, when lifted up and set down, falls to the ground again and again — so too, when access has arisen, the mind at one time takes the sign as its object, and at another time sinks into the life-continuum. But in absorption, the factors have become strong; and because the factors have become strong, just as a strong man, having risen from his seat, could stand even for a whole day — so too, when absorption concentration has arisen, the mind, having once cut off the course of the life-continuum, stands for an entire night, or an entire day, occurring simply by way of a succession of wholesome impulsion-consciousnesses.

Herein, as for this counterpart-sign that has arisen together with access concentration — its production is exceedingly difficult. Therefore, if one is able, in that very sitting, to expand that sign and attain absorption, excellent. But if one is not able, then that sign should be guarded heedfully, as one would guard a Wheel-Turning Monarch's unborn child. For thus —

For one who guards the sign, no decline of what has been gained occurs; when there is no protection, what has been gained is lost again and again.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The passage's famous string of similes — a mirror drawn from its pouch, a polished conch-dish, the moon breaking from behind clouds, cranes against a thundercloud — is doing careful conceptual work, not just painting a beautiful picture: each image depicts something already whole and perfect becoming suddenly visible, rather than something being gradually built or improved. The counterpart-sign is not a refined version of the learning-sign; it is described as bursting through it, as though the learning-sign's imperfections were a covering removed all at once rather than polished away over time.

The explicit denial that the counterpart-sign has color or shape is one of the more philosophically pointed moments in the whole treatise: it forecloses, directly and immediately, any reading of the sign as a special kind of visible object. Because it is "merely the mode of appearance to one who has attained concentration, born of perception," it cannot be examined the way an ordinary visible form can be examined by insight meditation — a point that matters later, when the text distinguishes what serenity meditation's objects are for from what insight meditation's objects are for.

The child-versus-strong-man simile for access versus absorption concentration is doing something the text has done before with the jhāna factors: translating an abstract technical distinction (whether the jhāna factors have "become strong") into something bodily and immediately intuitive. A toddler repeatedly set down and toppling over, against a grown man who can simply stand all day once he has risen — the difference in stability is the whole point, and no further explanation is needed once the image lands.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
paṭibhāganimitta

the counterpart-sign — already met in chapter 3's tenfold analysis of the forty meditation subjects; here given its full, vivid description for the first time, as the object that access concentration and absorption concentration are both built upon.

bhavaṅga

the life-continuum — bhava (existence) + aṅga (factor, limb); the passive, resting stream of consciousness a mind repeatedly "sinks into" during access concentration, in contrast to absorption's unbroken, continuous engagement with its object.

javana

impulsion — the technical Abhidhamma term for the moments of consciousness that "run swiftly" through an object, experiencing and evaluating it; absorption concentration is described here as a long, unbroken succession of wholesome javana moments.

cakkavattigabbha

a Wheel-Turning Monarch's unborn child — cakkavatti (a universal monarch) + gabbha (womb, embryo); the vivid standard of care this section prescribes for a newly gained counterpart-sign, before it has been secured in full absorption.

The Sevenfold Suitable and Unsuitable

Having gained the counterpart-sign, the meditator must now protect it — and the chapter identifies seven distinct domains of daily life, from one's dwelling down to one's own posture, each of which can either nurture the sign or quietly destroy it, to be tested individually rather than assumed.

Pali Source

Tatrāyaṃ rakkhaṇavidhi —

Āvāso gocaro bhassaṃ, puggalo bhojanaṃ utu;
Iriyāpathoti sattete, asappāye vivajjaye.

Sappāye satta sevetha, evañhi paṭipajjato;
Nacireneva kālena, hoti kassaci appanā.

Tatrassa yasmiṃ āvāse vasantassa anuppannaṃ vā nimittaṃ nuppajjati, uppannaṃ vā vinassati, anupaṭṭhitā ca sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṃ na samādhiyati, ayaṃ asappāyo. Yattha nimittaṃ uppajjati ceva thāvarañca hoti, sati upaṭṭhāti, cittaṃ samādhiyati nāgapabbatavāsīpadhāniyatissattherassa viya, ayaṃ sappāyo. Tasmā yasmiṃ vihāre bahū āvāsā honti, tattha ekamekasmiṃ tīṇi tīṇi divasāni vasitvā yatthassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, tattha vasitabbaṃ. Āvāsasappāyatāya hi tambapaṇṇidīpamhi cūḷanāgaleṇe vasantā tattheva kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā pañcasatā bhikkhū arahattaṃ pāpuṇiṃsu. Sotāpannādīnaṃ pana aññattha ariyabhūmiṃ patvā tattha arahattappattānañca gaṇanā natthi. Evamaññesupi cittalapabbatavihārādīsu.

Gocaragāmo pana yo senāsanato uttarena vā dakkhiṇena vā nātidūre diyaḍḍhakosabbhantare hoti sulabhasampannabhikkho, so sappāyo. Viparīto asappāyo.

Bhassanti dvattiṃsatiracchānakathāpariyāpannaṃ asappāyaṃ, tañhissa nimittantaradhānāya saṃvattati. Dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyaṃ, tampi mattāya bhāsitabbaṃ.

Puggalopi atiracchānakathiko sīlādiguṇasampanno, yaṃ nissāya asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ thirataraṃ hoti, evarūpo sappāyo. Kāyadaḷhībahulo pana tiracchānakathiko asappāyo. So hi taṃ kaddamodakamiva acchaṃ udakaṃ malīnameva karoti, tādisañca āgamma koṭapabbatavāsīdaharasseva samāpattipi nassati, pageva nimittaṃ.

Bhojanaṃ pana kassaci madhuraṃ, kassaci ambilaṃ sappāyaṃ hoti. Utupi kassaci sīto, kassaci uṇho sappāyo hoti. Tasmā yaṃ bhojanaṃ vā utuṃ vā sevantassa phāsu hoti, asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti, taṃ bhojanaṃ so ca utu sappāyo. Itaraṃ bhojanaṃ itaro ca utu asappāyo.

Iriyāpathesupi kassaci caṅkamo sappāyo hoti, kassaci sayanaṭṭhānanisajjānaṃ aññataro. Tasmā taṃ āvāsaṃ viya tīṇi divasāni upaparikkhitvā yasmiṃ iriyāpathe asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti, so sappāyo. Itaro asappāyoti veditabbo.

Iti imaṃ sattavidhaṃ asappāyaṃ vajjetvā sappāyaṃ sevitabbaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannassa hi nimittāsevanabahulassa nacireneva kālena hoti kassaci appanā.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, this is the method of protection —

Dwelling, resort village, talk, a person, food, climate, and posture — these are the seven; one should avoid the unsuitable among them.

One should resort to the seven when suitable; for thus, to one so practicing, absorption comes to some before long.

Herein, whatever dwelling is such that, for one dwelling there, an unarisen sign does not arise, or an arisen one is lost, and unestablished mindfulness does not become established, and an unconcentrated mind does not become concentrated — this is unsuitable. Where the sign both arises and remains stable, mindfulness becomes established, and the mind becomes concentrated — as in the case of the Elder Padhāniya Tissa who dwelt at Nāgapabbata — this is suitable. Therefore, where a monastery has many dwelling-cells, one should dwell three days in each in turn, and dwell in whichever one's mind becomes one-pointed. For, owing to the suitability of the dwelling, five hundred monks dwelling at Cūḷanāga Cave on the island of Tambapaṇṇi, having taken up their meditation subject right there, attained arahantship. And there is no reckoning the number of those who, having reached the noble plane elsewhere as stream-enterers and the rest, attained arahantship there. Likewise at other places such as Cittalapabbata Monastery.

As for the resort village: whichever is to the north or south of the dwelling, not too far, within a range of a league and a half, and has abundant, easily obtained almsfood, that is suitable. The opposite is unsuitable.

As for talk: what is included among the thirty-two kinds of worldly talk is unsuitable, for it leads to the disappearance of the sign. What is based on the ten grounds for proper talk is suitable; but even that should be spoken in moderation.

As for a person, too: one not given to worldly talk, endowed with virtue and other good qualities, in reliance on whom an unconcentrated mind becomes concentrated, or a concentrated mind becomes more stable — such a one is suitable. But one much given to bodily indulgence, and to worldly talk, is unsuitable. For he, like muddy water added to clear water, only sullies it; and, on encountering such a one, even the attainment of a young monk who dwelt at Koṭapabbata was lost — let alone the sign.

As for food: for some, sweet food is suitable; for others, sour food. As for climate, too: for some, cold is suitable; for others, heat. Therefore, whatever food or climate, when resorted to, is comfortable, and by which an unconcentrated mind becomes concentrated, or a concentrated one more stable — that food and that climate are suitable. The other kind of food, and the other climate, are unsuitable.

Among the postures, too: for some, walking is suitable; for others, one or another of lying down, standing, or sitting. Therefore, having examined it for three days, just as with the dwelling, whichever posture is such that an unconcentrated mind becomes concentrated in it, or a concentrated one more stable — that is suitable. The other should be understood as unsuitable.

Thus, avoiding this sevenfold unsuitability, one should resort to what is suitable. For to one practicing in this way, much given to cultivating the sign, absorption comes to some before long.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

Every one of the seven factors is settled the same experimental way — by trial over three days and observation of the actual effect on the mind — rather than by any general rule about what ought to suit a meditator. The text is explicit that food, climate, and posture cut in genuinely opposite directions for different people (sweet or sour, cold or hot, walking or sitting), which makes the testing method itself, not any specific preference, the real content of this section's advice.

The unnamed young monk of Koṭapabbata, whose attainment was lost simply through contact with an unsuitable companion, is a stark counterweight to the five hundred monks who reached arahantship at Cūḷanāga Cave through a suitable dwelling: the same section that shows how powerfully the right conditions can support practice also shows, in a single sentence, how completely the wrong ones can undo it — and the phrase "let alone the sign" makes clear that losing an already-attained jhāna is treated as a far graver loss than merely failing to gain the counterpart-sign in the first place.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
tiracchānakathā

worldly talk, literally "animal talk" — tiracchāna (an animal, something moving sideways/off the path) + kathā (talk); the standard canonical category (enumerated elsewhere as thirty-two topics) for conversation that pulls attention away from the path.

kathāvatthu

a ground for talk, a fit topic of discussion — kathā (talk) + vatthu (ground, basis); the ten canonical suitable topics (on wanting little, contentment, seclusion, and the like), still to be used "in moderation" even when appropriate.

kosa

a unit of distance, roughly a quarter of a league — used here in the compound diyaḍḍhakosa, "a league and a half," the outer range given for a suitably close resort village.

kāyadaḷhībahula

much given to bodily indulgence — kāya (body) + daḷhī (strengthening, hardiness) + bahula (much, given to); describing the unsuitable companion whose influence is compared to muddying clear water.

The Tenfold Skill in Absorption: Clean Basis and Balanced Faculties

For the meditator who still has not reached absorption through the sevenfold suitability just described, the chapter now sets out a fuller, ten-part skill — beginning with the physical cleanliness of one's own body and surroundings, and the far subtler skill of keeping the five spiritual faculties in balance with one another.

Pali Source

Yassa pana evampi paṭipajjato na hoti, tena dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ nayo, dasāhākārehi appanākosallaṃ icchitabbaṃ, vatthuvisadakiriyato, indriyasamattapaṭipādanato, nimittakusalato, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti, yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanato, samāhitapuggalasevanato, tadadhimuttatoti.

Tattha vatthuvisadakiriyā nāma ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā sedamalaggahitaṃ, tadā ajjhattikavatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā panassa cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ hoti, tadā bāhiravatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Ajjhattikabāhire ca vatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hoti, aparisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Aparisuddhena ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi avibhūtā honti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuḍḍhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ na gacchati. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhaṃ, parisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Parisuddhena ca ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi vibhūtā honti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ gacchati.

Indriyasamattapaṭipādanaṃ nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti, tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ, tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattheravatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā. Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño muddhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ abhibhavati. Balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃ vīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ abhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati. Vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati, tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti. Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evaṃ saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti. Vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti. Ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato kosajjapakkhena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati, tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā. Tenāha — "sati ca pana sabbatthikā vuttā bhagavatā. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Cittañhi satipaṭisaraṇaṃ, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā ca sati, na vinā satiyā cittassa paggahaniggaho hotī"ti.

Ru-Yi Translation

But for one who, practicing even in this way, still does not succeed, tenfold skill in absorption should be accomplished. Herein, this is the method: skill in absorption should be sought by these ten aspects — by making the physical basis clean; by bringing the faculties to a state of balance; by skill in the sign; by exerting the mind when it should be exerted; by restraining the mind when it should be restrained; by encouraging the mind when it should be encouraged; by looking on with equanimity at the mind when it should be so regarded; by avoiding unconcentrated persons; by associating with concentrated persons; and by being resolved upon that concentration.

Herein, "making the physical basis clean" means making both the internal and external bases clear and pure. For when one's hair, nails, and body-hair are long, or the body is covered with sweat and grime, then the internal basis is unclear, impure. And when one's robe is worn out, soiled, and foul-smelling, or the dwelling is untidy, then the external basis is unclear, impure. And when the internal and external bases are unclear, the knowledge in the mind and mental factors that arise is impure too — like the light of a lamp-flame that arises depending on an impure wick, oil-vessel, and oil. For one comprehending formations with impure knowledge, the formations too remain unclear; for one devoted to the meditation subject, the meditation subject too does not go to growth, increase, and fullness. But when the internal and external bases are clear, the knowledge in the mind and mental factors that arise is clear and pure too — like the light of a lamp-flame that arises depending on a pure wick, oil-vessel, and oil. And for one comprehending formations with pure knowledge, the formations too become clear; for one devoted to the meditation subject, the meditation subject too goes to growth, increase, and fullness.

"Bringing the faculties to a state of balance" means making the faculties of faith and the rest equal to one another. For if the faculty of faith is strong and the others weak, then the energy faculty cannot perform its function of exertion, the mindfulness faculty cannot perform its function of establishment, the concentration faculty cannot perform its function of non-distraction, and the understanding faculty cannot perform its function of seeing; therefore it should be reduced, either by reflecting on the nature of things, or by simply not attending to it in the manner by which it grew strong. The story of the Elder Vakkali is an illustration here. But if the energy faculty is strong, then the faith faculty cannot perform its function of resolve, nor can the others perform their respective functions; therefore it should be reduced by developing tranquility and the rest. The story of the Elder Soṇa should be shown here too. Likewise for the rest: when any one is strong, the incapacity of the others to perform their own functions should be understood. But especially, the balance of faith with understanding, and of concentration with energy, is praised here. For one of strong faith and weak understanding has a naive kind of confidence, becoming devoted to what is not a proper object. One of strong understanding and weak faith leans toward craftiness, and this fault becomes as incurable as a disease caused by medicine itself. Through the balance of both, one becomes devoted only to a proper object. But strong concentration with weak energy is overcome by laziness, since concentration is on the side of laziness. Strong energy with weak concentration is overcome by restlessness, since energy is on the side of restlessness. But concentration, yoked together with energy, cannot fall into laziness. Energy, yoked together with concentration, cannot fall into restlessness; therefore, both of these should be made equal. For it is through the balance of both that absorption comes about. Moreover, for one working on concentration, even strong faith is proper. For, believing and trusting in this way, he will attain absorption. But, between concentration and understanding, for one working on concentration, strong one-pointedness is proper. For thus he attains absorption. For one working on insight, strong understanding is proper. For thus he attains penetration of the characteristics. But through the balance of both, absorption comes about as well. But strong mindfulness is proper everywhere. For mindfulness protects the mind from falling into restlessness by way of faith, energy, and understanding, which are on the side of restlessness, and from falling into laziness by way of concentration, which is on the side of laziness; therefore it, like salt-seasoning in every dish, and like a minister competent in every task in every royal affair, should be desired everywhere. For this reason it was said: "And mindfulness was said by the Blessed One to be needed everywhere. For what reason? Because the mind has mindfulness as its refuge, and mindfulness is manifested as protection; without mindfulness, there is no exerting or restraining of the mind."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The lamp-flame simile is doing careful causal work: physical cleanliness is not treated as a virtue in itself, but as a condition for the clarity of the knowledge that will later comprehend formations in insight practice — an impure basis produces impure knowledge the same way an impure wick and oil produce a poor flame. The text is tracing a direct chain from housekeeping to liberating insight, which is exactly why something as mundane as trimmed nails belongs in a chapter about jhāna.

The faculty-balancing analysis is remarkably exact about which pairs matter and why: faith paired with understanding prevents both credulous devotion to unworthy objects and a clever but rootless skepticism, while energy paired with concentration prevents both restless overexertion and complacent laziness — each faculty, left to grow unchecked, tips over into a specific, named failure mode. Mindfulness alone is exempted from needing a partner, because its entire function is to watch for exactly this kind of imbalance in the other four; the salt and the competent minister similes both make the same point, that mindfulness's usefulness is not one particular job but constant, situational judgment applied everywhere else.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
indriya

a faculty — here, the five spiritual faculties (faith, energy, mindfulness, concentration, understanding) whose mutual balance, rather than the strength of any one alone, is what this section identifies as essential.

muddhappasanna

naively devoted, credulously confident — muddha (foolish, naive) + pasanna (confident, devoted); the specific failure mode of strong faith unbalanced by understanding.

kerāṭika

craftiness, cunning — the failure mode of strong understanding unbalanced by faith, compared here to a disease that resists even the medicine meant to cure it.

paṭisaraṇa

a refuge, a resort — paṭi (toward) + saraṇa (refuge); mindfulness is called the mind's own paṭisaraṇa, the one faculty every other mental operation depends on for its footing.

Skill in the Sign, and Exerting a Sluggish Mind

After briefly defining skill in the sign itself, the chapter turns to the third and most technically elaborate of the ten skills — knowing exactly when to rouse a sluggish mind rather than calm it, grounded directly in the Buddha's own teaching on the seven factors of enlightenment, complete with its celebrated fire-kindling simile.

Pali Source

Nimittakosallaṃ nāma pathavīkasiṇādikassa cittekaggatānimittassa akatassa karaṇakosallaṃ, katassa ca bhāvanākosallaṃ, bhāvanāya laddhassa rakkhaṇakosallañca, taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.

Kathañca yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti? Yadāssa atisithilavīriyatādīhi līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā —

"Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, udakavātañca dadeyya, paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti? No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, akālo samādhi … pe … akālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi dusamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Yasmiṃ ca kho, bhikkhave, līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti? Evaṃ bhante"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).

Ettha ca yathāsakamāhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ —

"Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā hīnappaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tathā "atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tathā "atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā dhammā. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tattha sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena pavattamanasikāro kusalādīsu yoniso manasikāro nāma. Ārambhadhātuādīnaṃ uppādanavasena pavattamanasikāro ārambhadhātuādīsu yoniso manasikāro nāma. Tattha ārambhadhātūti paṭhamavīriyaṃ vuccati. Nikkamadhātūti kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātūti paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā dhammāti pana pītiyā eva etaṃ nāmaṃ. Tassāpi uppādakamanasikārova yoniso manasikāro nāma.

Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatāti.

Ekādasadhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti apāyādibhayapaccavekkhaṇatā, vīriyāyattalokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamānisaṃsadassitā, "buddhapaccekabuddhamahāsāvakehi gatamaggo mayā gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu"nti evaṃ gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā, dāyakānaṃ mahapphalabhāvakaraṇena piṇḍāpacāyanatā, "vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī me satthā, so ca anatikkamanīyasāsano amhākañca bahūpakāro paṭipattiyā ca pūjiyamāno pūjito hoti na itarathā"ti evaṃ satthu mahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, "saddhammasaṅkhātaṃ me mahādāyajjaṃ gahetabbaṃ, tañca na sakkā kusītena gahetu"nti evaṃ dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, ālokasaññāmanasikārairiyāpathaparivattanaabbhokāsasevanādīhi thinamiddhavinodanatā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā, sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.

Ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti buddhānussati, dhamma … saṅgha … sīla … cāga … devatānussati, upasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddhapuggalasevanatā, pasādaniyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehi ākārehi ete dhamme uppādento dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti.

Ru-Yi Translation

"Skill in the sign" means skill in making the sign of one-pointedness of mind — such as the earth kasiṇa — when it has not been made; skill in developing it once made; and skill in protecting it once obtained through development. This is what is intended here.

And how does one exert the mind at the time it should be exerted? When, owing to excessively slack energy and the like, the mind becomes sluggish, then, not developing the three enlightenment factors beginning with tranquility, he develops the three beginning with investigation-of-states. For this was said by the Blessed One —

"Suppose, monks, a man wanted to kindle a small fire, and he were to put wet grass into it, and wet cow-dung, and wet sticks, and were to spray it with water, and scatter dust over it — would that man, monks, be able to kindle the small fire?" "No, venerable sir." "Just so, monks, when the mind is sluggish, that is not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of tranquility; not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of concentration ... not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of equanimity. Why is that? Because, monks, a sluggish mind is hard to arouse by means of these things. But, monks, when the mind is sluggish, that is the time to develop the enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states; the time to develop the enlightenment factor of energy; the time to develop the enlightenment factor of joy. Why is that? Because, monks, a sluggish mind is easily aroused by means of these things. Suppose, monks, a man wanted to kindle a small fire, and he were to put dry grass into it, and dry cow-dung, and dry sticks, and were to blow on it with his mouth, and not scatter dust over it — would that man, monks, be able to kindle the small fire?" "Yes, venerable sir" (S.N. 5.234).

And here, the development of the enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states and the rest should be understood by way of their own respective nutriments. For this was said —

"There are, monks, wholesome and unwholesome states, blameworthy and blameless states, inferior and superior states, states that have a dark and a bright counterpart. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Likewise: "There are, monks, the element of initiative, the element of release, the element of exertion. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of energy, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of energy once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Likewise: "There are, monks, states that are grounds for the enlightenment factor of joy. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of joy, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of joy once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Herein, attention that occurs by way of penetrating the individual and general characteristics of things is called "thorough attention" with regard to the wholesome and the rest. Attention that occurs by way of arousing the element of initiative and the rest is called "thorough attention" with regard to the element of initiative and the rest. Herein, "the element of initiative" refers to the first stage of energy. "The element of release" is so called because it has emerged from laziness, and is stronger than the former. "The element of exertion" is so called because it advances from one stage to the next, and is stronger even than that. "States that are grounds for the enlightenment factor of joy" is simply another name for joy itself. For it too, thorough attention means simply the attention that produces it.

Moreover, seven things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states: inquiring often; making the physical basis clean; bringing the faculties to balance; avoiding a person of weak understanding; associating with a person of understanding; reflecting on the domain of profound knowledge; and being resolved upon that investigation.

Eleven things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of energy: reflecting on the fear of the states of loss and the rest; seeing the benefit of attaining mundane and supramundane distinctions dependent on energy; reflecting on the course of one's own journey thus — "the path traveled by Buddhas, Paccekabuddhas, and great disciples is the path I must travel, and it cannot be traveled by one who is lazy"; honoring one's almsfood by making it of great fruit to the donors; reflecting on the greatness of the Teacher thus — "my Teacher is a praiser of the arousing of energy, his teaching is not to be transgressed, he is of great help to us, and is honored only by being honored through practice, not otherwise"; reflecting on the greatness of one's inheritance thus — "the great inheritance reckoned as the true Dhamma must be taken up by me, and it cannot be taken up by one who is lazy"; dispelling sloth and torpor by means of the perception of light, attending to it, changing posture, resorting to the open air, and the like; avoiding a lazy person; associating with a person of aroused energy; reflecting on right striving; and being resolved upon that energy.

Eleven things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of joy: recollection of the Buddha, of the Dhamma, of the Sangha, of virtue, of generosity, of deities, and of peace; avoiding a coarse person; associating with an affectionate person; reflecting on inspiring discourses; and being resolved upon that joy. Thus, producing these states in these ways, one is said to develop the enlightenment factors of investigation-of-states and the rest. This is how one exerts the mind at the time it should be exerted.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The fire-kindling simile makes a point that runs against a natural intuition: when the mind is dull and sluggish, the instinct might be to try to calm it further, but the Buddha's teaching says exactly the opposite — a sluggish mind needs the "dry" factors (investigation, energy, joy) that stir it up, while tranquility, concentration, and equanimity, applied at the wrong moment, would only smother it further, like wet fuel on a small flame. Skill here means correctly diagnosing which of two opposite treatments the mind actually needs at a given moment, not applying a single fixed technique regardless of the mind's condition.

The eleven conditions for energy are worth reading as a small anthology of reflections a discouraged meditator can draw on, each aimed at a different psychological lever: fear of the lower realms, the example of every past noble one who walked this same path, gratitude toward donors, reverence for the Teacher, a sense of inheritance, and simple physical measures like changing posture or seeking bright, open air. No single reflection is presented as sufficient on its own — the list itself is the teaching, offering a meditator several different doors into the same renewed effort depending on which one actually lands for him in the moment.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
bojjhaṅga

an enlightenment factor — bodhi (awakening) + aṅga (factor); the seven qualities (investigation-of-states, energy, joy, tranquility, concentration, equanimity, and mindfulness) whose careful, situational cultivation this whole section is built around.

līna

sluggish, shrunken, lazy — the specific condition of mind this section addresses, requiring the "dry" enlightenment factors rather than the calming ones.

ārambhadhātu / nikkamadhātu / parakkamadhātu

the elements of initiative, release, and exertion — three progressively stronger stages of energy, glossed here as the beginning, the breaking-free from laziness, and the sustained advance stage by stage.

dāyajja

an inheritance — invoked in one of the eleven energy-producing reflections as "the great inheritance reckoned as the true Dhamma," a legacy the text says cannot be claimed by a lazy person.

Restraining an Excited Mind

The chapter now gives the exact mirror image of the previous section — what to do when the mind is not sluggish but restless — with its own fire simile, this time about extinguishing rather than kindling, and its own three enlightenment factors with their own supporting conditions.

Pali Source

Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti? Yadāssa accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā —

"Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya … pe … na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti? No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, akālo vīriya … pe … akālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi duvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Yasmiṃ ca kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya … pe … paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti? Evaṃ, bhante"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.234).

Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā —

"Atthi, bhikkhave, kāyapassaddhi cittapassaddhi. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tathā "atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tathā "atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhāniyā dhammā. Tattha yoniso manasikārabahulīkāro, ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).

Tattha yathāssa passaddhiādayo uppannapubbā, taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tesaṃ uppādanavasena pavattamanasikāro va tīsupi padesu yoniso manasikāro nāma. Samathanimittanti ca samathassevetamadhivacanaṃ. Avikkhepaṭṭhena ca tasseva "abyagganimitta"nti.

Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhasevanatā, iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattapayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā, passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.

Ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti vatthuvisadatā, nimittakusalatā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, samaye cittassa niggahaṇatā, samaye cittassa paggahaṇatā, nirassādassa cittassa saddhāsaṃvegavasena sampahaṃsanatā, sammāpavattassa ajjhupekkhanatā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā, samāhitapuggalasevanatā, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.

Pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehākārehi ete dhamme uppādento passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti.

Ru-Yi Translation

And how does one restrain the mind at the time it should be restrained? When, owing to excessively intense energy and the like, the mind becomes restless, then, not developing the three enlightenment factors beginning with investigation-of-states, he develops the three beginning with tranquility. For this was said by the Blessed One —

"Suppose, monks, a man wanted to extinguish a great mass of fire, and he were to put dry grass into it ... and not scatter dust over it — would that man, monks, be able to extinguish the great mass of fire?" "No, venerable sir." "Just so, monks, when the mind is restless, that is not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of investigation-of-states; not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of energy ... not the time to develop the enlightenment factor of joy. Why is that? Because, monks, a restless mind is hard to calm by means of these things. But, monks, when the mind is restless, that is the time to develop the enlightenment factor of tranquility; the time to develop the enlightenment factor of concentration; the time to develop the enlightenment factor of equanimity. Why is that? Because, monks, a restless mind is easily calmed by means of these things. Suppose, monks, a man wanted to extinguish a great mass of fire, and he were to put wet grass into it ... and scatter dust over it — would that man, monks, be able to extinguish the great mass of fire?" "Yes, venerable sir" (S.N. 5.234).

Here too, the development of the enlightenment factor of tranquility and the rest should be understood by way of their own respective nutriments. For this was said by the Blessed One —

"There are, monks, tranquility of body and tranquility of mind. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of tranquility, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of tranquility once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Likewise: "There are, monks, the sign of serenity, the sign of non-distraction. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of concentration, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of concentration once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Likewise: "There are, monks, states that are grounds for the enlightenment factor of equanimity. Frequently giving thorough attention to these — this is the nutriment for the arising of the unarisen enlightenment factor of equanimity, and for the growth, fullness, and completion of the development of the enlightenment factor of equanimity once it has arisen" (S.N. 5.232).

Herein, having noted the manner in which tranquility and the rest have previously arisen for him, the attention that occurs by way of producing them, in all three cases, is called "thorough attention." "The sign of serenity" is simply another term for serenity itself. And, in the sense of non-distraction, that same thing is called "the sign of non-distraction."

Moreover, seven things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of tranquility: resorting to superior food; resorting to a comfortable climate; resorting to a comfortable posture; a balanced application of effort; avoiding a person of agitated body; associating with a person of tranquil body; and being resolved upon that tranquility.

Eleven things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of concentration: cleanliness of the physical basis; skill in the sign; bringing the faculties to balance; restraining the mind when it should be restrained; exerting the mind when it should be exerted; encouraging a mind without enjoyment by means of faith and a sense of urgency; looking on with equanimity at a mind rightly proceeding; avoiding an unconcentrated person; associating with a concentrated person; reflecting on the jhānas and liberations; and being resolved upon that concentration.

Five things conduce to the arising of the enlightenment factor of equanimity: neutrality toward beings; neutrality toward formations; avoiding a person attached to beings and formations; associating with a person neutral toward beings and formations; and being resolved upon that equanimity. Thus, producing these states in these ways, one is said to develop the enlightenment factors of tranquility and the rest. This is how one restrains the mind at the time it should be restrained.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The structure of this section against the previous one is worth seeing as a single, deliberate diptych rather than two separate teachings: the same seven enlightenment factors are split into two opposing sets of three (investigation/energy/joy versus tranquility/concentration/equanimity), each set governed by the identical logic of the fire simile, just aimed at opposite conditions. Mindfulness, notably, belongs to neither set — it is the constant seventh factor whose job, as established earlier in this chapter, is simply to notice which of the other two treatments the moment actually calls for.

The eleven conditions for concentration are strikingly self-referential: they include, among the ways to produce concentration, "restraining the mind when it should be restrained" and "exerting the mind when it should be exerted" — that is, two of the very skills this section itself is teaching are also listed as conditions that support the third. The tenfold skill in absorption is not ten separate techniques applied in sequence but an interlocking system, where correctly applying one skill is itself one of the conditions that makes the others work.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
uddhata

restless, excited, agitated — the mirror-image condition to līna (sluggish) from the previous section, requiring the calming rather than the arousing enlightenment factors.

passaddhi

tranquility — distinguished here into tranquility of body and tranquility of mind, the first of the three "calming" enlightenment factors developed when the mind is restless.

majjhattatā

neutrality, a state of being in the middle — majjha (middle) + -tā; the basis of the enlightenment factor of equanimity, applied here specifically toward beings and toward formations.

vimokkha

a liberation — one of the eight classical meditative liberations; reflecting on the jhānas and liberations is named here as a condition for developing the enlightenment factor of concentration.

Encouraging, Watching, and the Company One Keeps

The tenfold skill in absorption closes with its remaining four aspects — rousing a mind that has lost its enjoyment, leaving a well-balanced mind alone, and the simple but decisive matter of which people one avoids and which one seeks out — before a set of verses that draw the whole section together with a final image of delicate, evenly-applied skill.

Pali Source

Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti? Yadāssa paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā naṃ aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānussaraṇena cassa pasādaṃ janeti. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti.

Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati? Yadāssa evaṃ paṭipajjato alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthipaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadāssa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu na byāpāraṃ āpajjati, sārathi viya samappavattesu assesu. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati.

Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhapubbānaṃ anekakiccapasutānaṃ vikkhittahadayānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā pariccāgo.

Samāhitapuggalasevanatā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannānaṃ samādhilābhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ.

Tadadhimuttatā nāma samādhiadhimuttatā samādhigarusamādhininnasamādhipoṇasamādhipabbhāratāti attho.

Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ.

Evañhi sampādayato, appanākosallaṃ imaṃ;
Paṭiladdhe nimittasmiṃ, appanā sampavattati.

Evañhi paṭipannassa, sace sā nappavattati;
Tathāpi na jahe yogaṃ, vāyametheva paṇḍito.

Hitvā hi sammāvāyāmaṃ, visesaṃ nāma māṇavo;
Adhigacche parittampi, ṭhānametaṃ na vijjati.

Cittappavattiākāraṃ, tasmā sallakkhayaṃ budho;
Samataṃ vīriyasseva, yojayetha punappunaṃ.

Īsakampi layaṃ yantaṃ, paggaṇhetheva mānasaṃ;
Accāraddhaṃ nisedhetvā, samameva pavattaye.

Reṇumhi uppaladale, sutte nāvāya nāḷiyā;
Yathā madhukarādīnaṃ, pavatti sammavaṇṇitā.

Līnauddhatabhāvehi, mocayitvāna sabbaso;
Evaṃ nimittābhimukhaṃ, mānasaṃ paṭipādayeti.

Ru-Yi Translation

And how does one encourage the mind at the time it should be encouraged? When, owing to sluggishness in the application of understanding, or to not having attained the happiness of peace, the mind lacks enjoyment, then one stirs it up by reflecting on the eight grounds for a sense of urgency. The eight grounds for a sense of urgency are: the four of birth, aging, sickness, and death; the suffering of the states of loss as the fifth; the suffering rooted in the round of rebirth in the past; the suffering rooted in the round in the future; and the suffering rooted in the search for food in the present. And one generates confidence in him by recollecting the qualities of the Buddha, the Dhamma, and the Sangha. This is how one encourages the mind at the time it should be encouraged.

And how does one look on with equanimity at the mind at the time it should be so regarded? When, for one so practicing, the mind is neither sluggish nor restless, not lacking enjoyment, evenly engaged with its object, proceeding along the course of serenity — then he does not concern himself with exerting, restraining, or encouraging it, like a charioteer with horses that are running evenly. This is how one looks on with equanimity at the mind at the time it should be so regarded.

"Avoiding unconcentrated persons" means keeping far away from persons who have never entered upon the path of renunciation, who are occupied with many affairs, and whose hearts are distracted.

"Associating with concentrated persons" means approaching, from time to time, persons who have entered upon the path of renunciation and who have attained concentration.

"Being resolved upon that concentration" means being resolved upon concentration — the meaning being: regarding concentration as weighty, inclined toward concentration, tending toward concentration, sloping toward concentration.

Thus, this tenfold skill in absorption should be accomplished.

For to one thus accomplishing this skill in absorption, once the sign has been obtained, absorption comes about.

But if, for one so practicing, it does not come about, even so, the wise one should not abandon the effort, but should simply keep striving.

For there is no such possibility as a person, having given up right effort, attaining any distinction at all, even a small one.

Therefore, the wise one, observing the manner of the mind's occurrence, should apply an equal degree of energy again and again.

Should the mind sink even slightly, he should simply exert it; should it be overexcited, he should restrain it, and keep it proceeding evenly.

Just as the movements of bees and the like — upon pollen, upon a lotus petal, with a thread, a boat, or an axle — are rightly praised,

so, having released the mind entirely from the states of sluggishness and restlessness, one should direct it toward the sign in just this way.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The eight grounds for a sense of urgency give a discouraged mind something concrete to work with rather than simply exhorting it to feel motivated: four are the plain, universal facts of birth, aging, sickness, and death, a fifth is the suffering of the lower realms, and the last three anchor suffering specifically in the round of rebirth across past, future, and the very immediate present search for food. Urgency, in this account, is not manufactured from nothing — it is generated by turning attention toward facts that are already true, simply not usually held in mind.

The charioteer simile for equanimity captures something easy to miss about this whole tenfold system: skill here is not about constant intervention but about knowing when to do nothing at all. A charioteer whose horses are already running evenly does not pull the reins or crack the whip — any intervention at that point would only disturb what is already working. The final verses' image of a bee's touch on pollen or a petal makes the same point from a different angle: the goal throughout this entire section has never been forceful control, but a light, exactly calibrated touch, applied only where and when it is actually needed.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
saṃvega

a sense of urgency — already met several times in this translation project; here organized into eight specific canonical grounds, from birth and death to the daily search for food.

nirassāda

lacking enjoyment, without relish — nis (without) + assāda (enjoyment, relish); the specific condition of a discouraged mind this section addresses through urgency and confidence.

ajjhupekkhati

to look on with equanimity, to regard evenly — adhi + upa + ikkhati; the fourth of the four mind-management skills, applied only once the mind is already proceeding well on its own.

nekkhammapaṭipada

the path of renunciation — nekkhamma (renunciation) + paṭipadā (path, way of practice); the marker distinguishing the "unconcentrated persons" to avoid from the "concentrated persons" to seek out.

Five Similes for Evenly-Balanced Effort

Before finally narrating the attainment of jhāna itself, the chapter pauses on five vivid similes of skilled craft — a bee gathering pollen, a surgeon's apprentice, a spider-silk gatherer, a ship's navigator, and an oil-pourer — each contrasting two kinds of failure (too fast, too timid) against the single correct middle way, then applies the same pattern directly to the meditator's own effort.

Pali Source

Tatrāyamatthadīpanā — yathā hi acheko madhukaro asukasmiṃ rukkhe pupphaṃ pupphitanti ñatvā tikkhena vegena pakkhando taṃ atikkamitvā paṭinivattento khīṇe reṇumhi sampāpuṇāti. Aparo acheko mandena javena pakkhando khīṇeyeva sampāpuṇāti. Cheko pana samena javena pakkhando sukhena puppharāsiṃ sampatvā yāvadicchakaṃ reṇuṃ ādāya madhuṃ sampādetvā madhurasamanubhavati.

Yathā ca sallakattaantevāsikesu udakathālagate uppalapatte satthakammaṃ sikkhantesu eko acheko vegena satthaṃ pātento uppalapattaṃ dvidhā vā chindati, udake vā paveseti. Aparo acheko chijjanapavesanabhayā satthakena phusitumpi na visahati. Cheko pana samena payogena tattha satthapahāraṃ dassetvā pariyodātasippo hutvā tathārūpesu ṭhānesu kammaṃ katvā lābhaṃ labhati.

Yathā ca yo catubyāmappamāṇaṃ makkaṭasuttamāharati, so cattāri sahassāni labhatīti raññā vutte eko achekapuriso vegena makkaṭasuttamākaḍḍhanto tahiṃ tahiṃ chindatiyeva. Aparo acheko chedanabhayā hatthena phusitumpi na visahati. Cheko pana koṭito paṭṭhāya samena payogena daṇḍake vedhetvā āharitvā lābhaṃ labhati.

Yathā ca acheko niyāmako balavavāte laṅkāraṃ pūrento nāvaṃ videsaṃ pakkhandāpeti. Aparo acheko mandavāte laṅkāraṃ oropento nāvaṃ tattheva ṭhapeti. Cheko pana mandavāte laṅkāraṃ pūretvā balavavāte aḍḍhalaṅkāraṃ katvā sotthinā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇāti.

Yathā ca yo telena achaḍḍento nāḷiṃ pūreti, so lābhaṃ labhatīti ācariyena antevāsikānaṃ vutte eko acheko lābhaluddho vegena pūrento telaṃ chaḍḍeti. Aparo acheko telachaḍḍanabhayā āsiñcitumpi na visahati. Cheko pana samena payogena pūretvā lābhaṃ labhati.

Evameva eko bhikkhu uppanne nimitte "sīghameva appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmī"ti gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti, tassa cittaṃ accāraddhavīriyattā uddhacce patati, so na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Eko accāraddhavīriyatāya dosaṃ disvā "kiṃ dānime appanāyā"ti vīriyaṃ hāpeti, tassa cittaṃ atilīnavīriyattā kosajje patati, sopi na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Yo pana īsakampi līnaṃ līnabhāvato uddhataṃ uddhaccato mocetvā samena payogena nimittābhimukhaṃ pavatteti, so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tādisena bhavitabbaṃ. Imamatthaṃ sandhāya etaṃ vuttaṃ —

Reṇumhi uppaladale, sutte nāvāya nāḷiyā;
Yathā madhukarādīnaṃ, pavatti sammavaṇṇitā.

Līnauddhatabhāvehi, mocayitvāna sabbaso;
Evaṃ nimittābhimukhaṃ, mānasaṃ paṭipādayeti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, this is an illustration of the meaning — just as an unskilled bee, knowing that a certain tree has flowered, having darted at it with sharp speed, overshoots it, and, turning back, arrives only when the pollen is exhausted; another unskilled one, having darted with sluggish speed, arrives only when it is already exhausted; but a skilled one, having darted with even speed, easily reaches the mass of flowers, takes as much pollen as it wishes, produces honey, and enjoys the taste of honey.

And just as, among surgeons' apprentices practicing knife-work on a lotus leaf floating in a water-bowl, one unskilled one, bringing the knife down with speed, either cuts the lotus leaf in two, or pushes it into the water; another unskilled one, from fear of cutting it or pushing it under, does not even dare to touch it with the knife; but a skilled one, applying even effort, demonstrates the knife-stroke there, and, his skill perfected, performs work in such places and gains a reward.

And just as, when a king announces that whoever brings four fathoms' length of spider-silk thread will receive four thousand coins, one unskilled man, pulling the spider-silk with speed, keeps breaking it here and there; another unskilled one, from fear of breaking it, does not even dare to touch it with his hand; but a skilled one, starting from the end, with even effort, winds it around a stick, brings it, and gains the reward.

And just as an unskilled navigator, filling the sail in a strong wind, drives the ship off to a foreign place; another unskilled one, lowering the sail in a gentle wind, leaves the ship stationary right there; but a skilled one, filling the sail in a gentle wind, and making it half-full in a strong wind, safely reaches the desired place.

And just as, when a teacher tells his pupils that whoever fills a tube with oil without spilling it will receive a reward, one unskilled one, greedy for the reward, filling it with speed, spills the oil; another unskilled one, from fear of spilling the oil, does not even dare to pour it in; but a skilled one, filling it with even effort, gains the reward.

Just so, when the sign has arisen, one monk, thinking "I shall quickly reach absorption," makes intense effort; his mind, owing to overexerted energy, falls into restlessness, and he is unable to reach absorption. Another, seeing the fault in overexerted energy, thinking "what use is this absorption to me," lets his energy slacken; his mind, owing to overly slack energy, falls into laziness, and he too is unable to reach absorption. But whoever, releasing even a slight sluggishness from its sluggish state and a slight restlessness from its restless state, keeps the mind directed toward the sign with even effort — he reaches absorption; one should be like this. With reference to this meaning, this was said —

Just as the movements of bees and the like — upon pollen, upon a lotus petal, with a thread, a boat, or a tube — are rightly praised,

so, having released the mind entirely from the states of sluggishness and restlessness, one should direct it toward the sign in just this way.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

All five similes share an identical structure — two named failures flanking a single correct middle path — and the repetition itself is part of the teaching: by the fifth retelling, the reader has fully internalized that skill is never a matter of trying harder or holding back more, but of a specific, situational calibration that has to be learned by feel, the way a navigator learns to read wind strength or a surgeon's apprentice learns exactly how much pressure a lotus leaf can bear. None of the five crafts is inherently related to meditation; their only common thread is this evenness itself.

The closing couplet's compressed list — pollen, lotus petal, thread, boat, and tube — functions as a kind of index back to all five stories at once, trusting the reader to unpack each single word into its full narrative. This is a recognizable feature of how verse operates throughout the Visuddhimagga: prose gives the full illustration, and the verse that follows compresses it into a form meant for memorization and recall, not for standing alone.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
acheka / cheka

unskilled / skilled — the pivotal contrast running through all five similes, with two named subtypes of "unskilled" (too fast, too timid) in each case.

makkaṭasutta

spider-silk thread — makkaṭa (spider) + sutta (thread); the prize-winning material in the third simile, valuable precisely because of how easily it snaps under uneven pressure.

laṅkāra

a sail — the object a navigator fills fully, partly, or not at all depending on wind strength, in the fourth simile's illustration of matching effort to conditions.

accāraddhavīriya

overexerted energy — ati (excessive) + āraddha (aroused, undertaken) + vīriya (energy); the specific fault, opposite to atilīnavīriya (overly slack energy), that this whole section's application to jhāna is built around.

The First Jhāna: The Moment of Absorption

The chapter now narrates, moment by moment, the precise cognitive process by which absorption actually occurs — a sequence of named mind-moments leading up to a single instant of full jhāna — including a rejected minority opinion from an Abhidhamma specialist, before finally quoting the canonical formula for the first jhāna itself.

Pali Source

Iti evaṃ nimittābhimukhaṃ mānasaṃ paṭipādayato panassa idāni appanā ijjhissatīti bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā pathavī pathavīti anuyogavasena upaṭṭhitaṃ tadeva pathavīkasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanamuppajjati. Tato tasmiṃyevārammaṇe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Tesu avasāne ekaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ, sesāni kāmāvacarāni. Pakaticittehi balavataravitakkavicārapītisukhacittekaggatāni yāni appanāya parikammattā parikammānītipi, yathā gāmādīnaṃ āsannapadeso gāmūpacāro nagarūpacāroti vuccati, evaṃ appanāya āsannattā samīpacārattā vā upacārānītipi, ito pubbe parikammānaṃ, upari appanāya ca anulomato anulomānītipi vuccanti. Yañcettha sabbantimaṃ, taṃ parittagottābhibhavanato, mahaggatagottabhāvanato ca gotrabhūtipi vuccati. Agahitaggahaṇena panettha paṭhamaṃ parikammaṃ, dutiyaṃ upacāraṃ, tatiyaṃ anulomaṃ, catutthaṃ gotrabhu. Paṭhamaṃ vā upacāraṃ, dutiyaṃ anulomaṃ, tatiyaṃ gotrabhu, catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appanācittaṃ. Catutthameva hi pañcamaṃ vā appeti, tañca kho khippābhiññadandhābhiññavasena. Tato paraṃ javanaṃ patati. Bhavaṅgassa vāro hoti.

Ābhidhammikagodattatthero pana "purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ āsevanapaccayena paccayo"ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.12) imaṃ suttaṃ vatvā āsevanapaccayena pacchimo pacchimo dhammo balavā hoti, tasmā chaṭṭhepi sattamepi appanā hotīti āha, taṃ aṭṭhakathāsu "attano matimattaṃ therassetan"ti vatvā paṭikkhittaṃ. Catutthapañcamesuyeva pana appanā hoti. Parato javanaṃ patitaṃ nāma hoti, bhavaṅgassa āsannattāti vuttaṃ. Tameva vicāretvā vuttattā na sakkā paṭikkhipituṃ. Yathā hi puriso chinnapapātābhimukho dhāvanto ṭhātukāmopi pariyante pādaṃ katvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti papāte eva patati, evaṃ chaṭṭhe vā sattame vā appetuṃ na sakkoti, bhavaṅgassa āsannattā. Tasmā catutthapañcamesuyeva appanā hotīti veditabbā.

Sā ca pana ekacittakkhaṇikāyeva. Sattasu hi ṭhānesu addhānaparicchedo nāma natthi — paṭhamappanāyaṃ, lokiyābhiññāsu, catūsu maggesu, maggānantaraphale, rūpārūpabhavesu bhavaṅgajjhāne, nirodhassa paccaye nevasaññānāsaññāyatane, nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa phalasamāpattiyanti. Ettha maggānantaraphalaṃ tiṇṇaṃ upari na hoti. Nirodhassa paccayo nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ dvinnamupari na hoti. Rūpārūpesu bhavaṅgassa parimāṇaṃ natthi, sesaṭṭhānesu ekameva cittanti. Iti ekacittakkhaṇikāyeva appanā. Tato bhavaṅgapāto. Atha bhavaṅgaṃ vocchinditvā jhānapaccavekkhaṇatthāya āvajjanaṃ, tato jhānapaccavekkhaṇanti.

Ettāvatā ca panesa "vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehi savitakkaṃ savicāraṃ vivekajaṃ pītisukhaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati" (dha. sa. 160; dī. ni. 1.226). Evamanena pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Thus, for one who is directing the mind toward the sign in this way, now, as though "absorption will succeed," having interrupted the life-continuum, a mind-door-adverting consciousness arises, taking as its object that same earth kasiṇa which has become present through the exercise of attention, by way of "earth, earth." Then, on that very same object, four or five impulsion-consciousnesses run their course. Among these, the last one is of the fine-material sphere; the rest are of the sense sphere. These, possessing applied thought, sustained thought, joy, happiness, and one-pointedness stronger than the ordinary mind, are called, because they constitute the preliminary work for absorption, "preliminary-work consciousnesses"; and, just as the area near a village or the like is called the "village-vicinity" or "city-vicinity," so too, because of their nearness to absorption, they are called "access consciousnesses"; and, because they conform to what precedes and to what follows, they are also called "conformity consciousnesses." And whichever of these is the very last is also called "change-of-lineage," because it overcomes the limited lineage of sense-sphere consciousness and produces the exalted lineage of fine-material consciousness. Herein, taking the case not yet covered: the first is preliminary-work, the second is access, the third is conformity, the fourth is change-of-lineage. Or: the first is access, the second is conformity, the third is change-of-lineage, and the fourth or fifth is the absorption-consciousness. For it is only the fourth, or the fifth, that attains absorption, and this by way of quick or slow direct knowledge. Beyond that, the impulsion lapses; it becomes the turn of the life-continuum to resume.

But the Elder Godatta, an Abhidhamma specialist, having cited this text — "earlier wholesome states are a condition, by way of the condition of repetition, for later wholesome states" (Paṭṭhāna 1.1.12) — said that, by the condition of repetition, each successive later state becomes stronger, and therefore absorption can occur even at the sixth or seventh impulsion; this was rejected in the commentaries, saying, "that is merely the elder's own opinion." But absorption occurs only at the fourth or fifth. It was said that, beyond that, the impulsion is said to lapse, because of the nearness of the life-continuum. Since this was said after due consideration, it cannot be rejected. For just as a man running toward the edge of a sheer precipice, even wishing to stop, cannot plant his foot at the very edge and stop, but falls right into the chasm — so too, one cannot attain absorption at the sixth or seventh, because of the nearness of the life-continuum. Therefore it should be understood that absorption occurs only at the fourth or fifth.

And that absorption lasts for only a single mind-moment. For in seven cases there is no delimitation of duration: in the first absorption; in the mundane direct knowledges; in the four paths; in the fruit immediately following the path; in the fine-material and immaterial planes of existence, in the jhāna that is the life-continuum; in the base of neither-perception-nor-non-perception as the condition for cessation; and in the fruition-attainment of one emerging from cessation. Herein, the fruit immediately following the path does not occur beyond three moments. The base of neither-perception-nor-non-perception, as the condition for cessation, does not occur beyond two moments. In the fine-material and immaterial planes, there is no fixed measure for the life-continuum; in the remaining cases, it is a single mind-moment only. Thus absorption itself lasts for a single mind-moment only. After that, the mind lapses into the life-continuum. Then, having interrupted the life-continuum, an adverting consciousness arises for the purpose of reviewing the jhāna, and after that, the reviewing of the jhāna takes place.

And with this much, he dwells having attained the first jhāna — "quite secluded from sense-pleasures, secluded from unwholesome states, accompanied by applied thought and sustained thought, born of seclusion, filled with joy and happiness" (Dhammasaṅgaṇī 160; D.N. 1.226). Thus, by him, the first jhāna of the earth kasiṇa has been attained — one that has abandoned five factors, is possessed of five factors, is good in three ways, and is endowed with ten characteristics.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The named sequence of mind-moments — preliminary-work, access, conformity, change-of-lineage, and finally the single moment of absorption itself — shows the Abhidhamma method at its most exacting: even an event a meditator experiences as one continuous shift into deep concentration is analyzed here into a precise, named succession of individual mental events, each with its own technical role. The three different names given to the same middle stretch of consciousnesses (preliminary-work, access, conformity) are not three different things but the same moments described from three different angles — nearness to the goal, resemblance to what surrounds them, function — a reminder that Abhidhamma terminology often multiplies names for a single reality rather than multiplying realities themselves.

The rejection of Elder Godatta's view is a rare moment where the commentarial tradition explicitly names a specific, respected specialist and overrules him — not because his citation was wrong, but because a general principle (repetition strengthens later states) was pushed further than the specific mechanics of the mind-door process actually allow. The precipice simile that follows makes the counter-argument vivid: proximity to the life-continuum functions like a cliff edge, a hard structural limit that no amount of accumulated momentum can push past, regardless of how sound the general principle behind Godatta's reasoning otherwise was.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
javana

impulsion — already met in chapter 3's description of absorption concentration; here given its full technical breakdown into preliminary-work, access, conformity, and change-of-lineage moments.

gotrabhū

change-of-lineage — gotra (lineage, clan) + bhū (becoming); the pivotal single mind-moment that overcomes the "lineage" of sense-sphere consciousness and opens onto the fine-material sphere, immediately preceding absorption itself.

bhavaṅga

the life-continuum — already met in this chapter's account of access versus absorption concentration; here, the resting stream of consciousness that the mind-door process interrupts, and that resumes immediately after the single moment of absorption ends.

āsevanapaccaya

the condition of repetition — āsevana (repeated practice, cultivation) + paccaya (condition); the Abhidhamma principle Elder Godatta invoked, correctly cited but, in the commentators' judgment, misapplied to argue for a longer javana sequence than the mind-door process permits.

The Meaning of "Quite Secluded from Sense-Pleasures"

The chapter now works through the canonical first-jhāna formula word by word, beginning with its opening phrase — asking, with real philosophical precision, why the restricting word "quite" appears only once, and showing the same twofold seclusion (from sense-pleasures, from unwholesome states) cutting cleanly across five completely different classification schemes at once.

Pali Source

Tattha vivicceva kāmehīti kāmehi viviccitvā vinā hutvā apakkamitvā. Yo panāyamettha evakāro, so niyamatthoti veditabbo. Yasmā ca niyamattho, tasmā tasmiṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ upasampajja viharaṇasamaye avijjamānānampi kāmānaṃ tassa paṭhamajjhānassa paṭipakkhabhāvaṃ kāmapariccāgeneva cassa adhigamaṃ dīpeti.

Kathaṃ? "Vivicceva kāmehī"ti evañhi niyame kariyamāne idaṃ paññāyati, nūna jhānassa kāmā paṭipakkhabhūtā yesu sati idaṃ nappavattati, andhakāre sati padīpobhāso viya. Tesaṃ pariccāgeneva cassa adhigamo hoti, orimatīrapariccāgena pārimatīrasseva. Tasmā niyamaṃ karotīti.

Tattha siyā, kasmā panesa pubbapadeyeva vutto, na uttarapade, kiṃ akusalehi dhammehi aviviccāpi jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyyāti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṃnissaraṇato hi pubbapade esa vutto. Kāmadhātusamatikkamanato hi kāmarāgapaṭipakkhato ca idaṃ jhānaṃ kāmānameva nissaraṇaṃ. Yathāha, "kāmānametaṃ nissaraṇaṃ yadidaṃ nekkhamma"nti (dī. ni. 3.353). Uttarapadepi pana yathā "idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo, idha dutiyo samaṇo"ti (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) ettha evakāro ānetvā vuccati, evaṃ vattabbo. Na hi sakkā ito aññehipi nīvaraṇasaṅkhātehi akusaladhammehi avivicca jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tasmā "vivicceva kāmehi vivicceva akusalehi dhammehī"ti evaṃ padadvayepi esa daṭṭhabbo. Padadvayepi ca kiñcāpi "viviccā"ti iminā sādhāraṇavacanena tadaṅgavivekādayo, kāyavivekādayo ca sabbepi vivekā saṅgahaṃ gacchanti, tathāpi kāyaviveko cittaviveko vikkhambhanavivekoti tayo eva idha daṭṭhabbā.

Kāmehīti iminā pana padena ye ca niddese "katame vatthukāmā, manāpiyā rūpā"tiādinā (mahāni. 1) nayena vatthukāmā vuttā, ye ca tattheva vibhaṅge ca "chando kāmo, rāgo kāmo, chandarāgo kāmo, saṅkappo kāmo, rāgo kāmo, saṅkapparāgo kāmo, ime vuccanti kāmā"ti (mahāni. 1; vibha. 564) evaṃ kilesakāmā vuttā, te sabbepi saṅgahitāicceva daṭṭhabbā. Evañhi sati vivicceva kāmehīti vatthukāmehipi viviccevāti attho yujjati, tena kāyaviveko vutto hoti. Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti kilesakāmehi sabbākusalehi vā viviccāti attho yujjati, tena cittaviveko vutto hoti. Purimena cettha vatthukāmehi vivekavacanato eva kāmasukhapariccāgo, dutiyena kilesakāmehi vivekavacanato nekkhammasukhapariggaho vibhāvito hoti. Evaṃ vatthukāmakilesakāmavivekavacanatoyeva ca etesaṃ paṭhamena saṃkilesavatthuppahānaṃ, dutiyena saṃkilesappahānaṃ. Paṭhamena lolabhāvassa hetupariccāgo, dutiyena bālabhāvassa. Paṭhamena ca payogasuddhi, dutiyena āsayaposanaṃ vibhāvitaṃ hotīti viññātabbaṃ. Esa tāva nayo kāmehīti ettha vuttakāmesu vatthukāmapakkhe.

Kilesakāmapakkhe pana chandoti ca rāgoti ca evamādīhi anekabhedo kāmacchandoyeva kāmoti adhippeto. So ca akusalapariyāpannopi samāno "tattha katamo kāmo chando kāmo"tiādinā (vibha. 564) nayena vibhaṅge jhānapaṭipakkhato visuṃ vutto. Kilesakāmattā vā purimapade vutto, akusalapariyāpannattā dutiyapade. Anekabhedato cassa kāmatoti avatvā kāmehīti vuttaṃ.

Aññesampi ca dhammānaṃ akusalabhāve vijjamāne "tattha katame akusalā dhammā, kāmacchando"tiādinā nayena vibhaṅge upari jhānaṅgānaṃ paccanīkapaṭipakkhabhāvadassanato nīvaraṇāneva vuttāni. Nīvaraṇāni hi jhānaṅgapaccanīkāni, tesaṃ jhānaṅgāneva paṭipakkhāni viddhaṃsakāni vighātakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi samādhi kāmacchandassa paṭipakkho, pīti byāpādassa, vitakko thinamiddhassa, sukhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccassa, vicāro vicikicchāyāti peṭake vuttaṃ.

Evamettha vivicceva kāmehīti iminā kāmacchandassa vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hoti. Vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti iminā pañcannampi nīvaraṇānaṃ, agahitaggahaṇena pana paṭhamena kāmacchandassa, dutiyena sesanīvaraṇānaṃ. Tathā paṭhamena tīsu akusalamūlesu pañcakāmaguṇabhedavisayassa lobhassa, dutiyena āghātavatthubhedādivisayānaṃ dosamohānaṃ. Oghādīsu vā dhammesu paṭhamena kāmoghakāmayogakāmāsavakāmupādānaabhijjhākāyaganthakāmarāgasaṃyojanānaṃ, dutiyena avasesaoghayogāsavaupādānaganthasaṃyojanānaṃ. Paṭhamena ca taṇhāya taṃsampayuttakānañca, dutiyena avijjāya taṃsampayuttakānañca. Apica paṭhamena lobhasampayuttānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃ cittuppādānaṃ, dutiyena sesānaṃ catunnaṃ akusalacittuppādānaṃ vikkhambhanaviveko vutto hotīti veditabbo. Ayaṃ tāva vivicceva kāmehi vivicca akusalehi dhammehīti ettha atthappakāsanā.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "quite secluded from sense-pleasures" means having become separated from, without, and having departed from sense-pleasures. And the word "quite" here should be understood as having the sense of a restriction. And since it has the sense of a restriction, it indicates both that sense-pleasures, even though not present at the time of dwelling having attained the first jhāna, are the opposite of that first jhāna, and that its attainment comes about only through the abandonment of sense-pleasures.

How? For when the restriction "quite secluded from sense-pleasures" is made in this way, this becomes evident: surely sense-pleasures are the very opposite of jhāna, since, when they are present, this jhāna does not occur — just as the light of a lamp does not occur when darkness is present. And its attainment comes about only through their abandonment, just as one reaches the far shore only by abandoning the near shore. Therefore it makes a restriction.

Herein, one might ask: why is this restricting word used only in the first phrase, and not in the second — could one, then, dwell having attained jhāna even without being secluded from unwholesome states? But this should not be understood in that way. For it is used in the first phrase because that seclusion from sense-pleasures is jhāna's actual escape. For, since it transcends the sense-desire realm and is the opposite of sensual lust, this jhāna is the escape specifically from sense-pleasures. As it is said, "this is the escape from sense-pleasures, namely renunciation" (D.N. 3.353). But in the second phrase too, it should be understood as though the word "quite" were carried over and applied there as well — just as, in the passage "it is only here, monks, that there is a true ascetic; here, a second kind of ascetic" (M.N. 1.139; A.N. 4.241), the restricting word is understood to apply to both. For it is indeed not possible to dwell having attained jhāna without being secluded from these, or from other unwholesome states reckoned as hindrances. Therefore, it should be understood as though the restricting particle applied in both phrases: "quite secluded from sense-pleasures, quite secluded from unwholesome states." And, in both phrases, although by this general word "secluded" all kinds of seclusion — substitution-of-opposites-seclusion and the rest, bodily seclusion and the rest — are included, nevertheless only three should be understood here: bodily seclusion, mental seclusion, and seclusion by suppression.

But by this word "sense-pleasures," both what are called "object-sense-pleasures," spoken of in the Niddesa by the method beginning "what are the object-sense-pleasures? Agreeable forms..." (Mahāniddesa 1), and what are called "defilement-sense-pleasures," spoken of there and in the Vibhaṅga thus — "desire is a sense-pleasure, lust is a sense-pleasure, desire-and-lust is a sense-pleasure, thought is a sense-pleasure, lust is a sense-pleasure, thought-and-lust is a sense-pleasure — these are called sense-pleasures" (Mahāniddesa 1; Vibhaṅga 564) — all of these should be understood as included. For, this being so, the meaning "quite secluded from sense-pleasures" fits as "quite secluded from object-sense-pleasures too"; by this, bodily seclusion is expressed. "Secluded from unwholesome states" fits the meaning "secluded from defilement-sense-pleasures, or from all unwholesome states"; by this, mental seclusion is expressed. And herein, by the first, through the statement of seclusion from object-sense-pleasures, the abandonment of sensual happiness is made clear; by the second, through the statement of seclusion from defilement-sense-pleasures, the taking up of the happiness of renunciation is made clear. And thus, simply through the statement of seclusion from object- and defilement-sense-pleasures — by the first, the abandonment of the ground of defilement is expressed; by the second, the abandonment of the defilement itself. By the first, the abandonment of the cause of fickleness; by the second, of the cause of foolishness. And it should be understood that, by the first, purity of undertaking is made clear; by the second, the nourishing of one's underlying disposition. This, for now, is the method with regard to the object-sense-pleasures side of the sense-pleasures spoken of in the word "sense-pleasures."

But on the side of defilement-sense-pleasures, it is simply desire-for-sensual-pleasure itself — with its many divisions such as desire, lust, and the rest — that is intended by "sense-pleasure." And this, although included among unwholesome states, was stated separately in the Vibhaṅga, by the method beginning "herein, what is sense-pleasure? Desire is sense-pleasure" (Vibhaṅga 564), because it is jhāna's direct opposite. Or: it is mentioned in the first phrase because it is a defilement-sense-pleasure, and in the second phrase because it is included among unwholesome states. And, because of its many divisions, it was said "from sense-pleasures," not "from sense-pleasure."

And although other unwholesome states exist too, only the hindrances are mentioned, because, in the Vibhaṅga, by the method beginning "herein, what are the unwholesome states? Desire for sensual pleasure...", they are shown, further on, to be the direct opposites of the jhāna factors. For the hindrances are the opposites of the jhāna factors; it is said that the jhāna factors themselves are what oppose, destroy, and demolish them. For thus it is said in the Peṭaka: concentration is the opposite of desire for sensual pleasure; joy, of ill will; applied thought, of sloth and torpor; happiness, of restlessness and worry; and sustained thought, of doubt.

Thus, herein, by "quite secluded from sense-pleasures," the seclusion by suppression of desire for sensual pleasure is expressed. By "secluded from unwholesome states," the seclusion by suppression of all five hindrances is expressed; but, taking the case not yet covered, by the first phrase it applies chiefly to desire for sensual pleasure, and by the second, to the remaining hindrances. Likewise, by the first, among the three unwholesome roots, the seclusion is of greed, whose object is the distinctions among the five strands of sensual pleasure; by the second, of hatred and delusion, whose objects are the distinctions among the grounds for resentment and the rest. Or, among such states as the floods, by the first, it applies to the flood of sense-desire, the yoke of sense-desire, the taint of sense-desire, the clinging to sense-pleasures, the body-tie of covetousness, and the fetter of sensual lust; by the second, to the remaining floods, yokes, taints, clingings, ties, and fetters. And by the first, it applies to craving and its associated states; by the second, to ignorance and its associated states. Moreover, it should be understood that, by the first, the seclusion by suppression of the eight kinds of consciousness associated with greed is expressed; by the second, of the remaining four kinds of unwholesome consciousness. This, for now, is the exposition of the meaning of "quite secluded from sense-pleasures, secluded from unwholesome states."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The whole passage turns on a small grammatical puzzle with real doctrinal stakes: the Pāli particle eva ("quite," "only") appears attached to the first phrase but not the second, and the text takes this seriously enough to ask directly whether jhāna could therefore be attained while still harboring unwholesome states other than sense-desire. The answer — that the restriction is understood to carry over to the second phrase by an implicit repetition, exactly as in a cited canonical parallel about "a true ascetic" — is a small but genuine piece of textual reasoning, treating grammar as a place where doctrine can hide and need to be carefully extracted.

The heart of the section is the twofold division into "object-sense-pleasures" (external things like agreeable sights) and "defilement-sense-pleasures" (the internal desire and lust themselves) mapping onto bodily seclusion and mental seclusion respectively — and the text then shows this exact same two-part division recurring, unprompted, across five completely different technical schemes: the wholesome/unwholesome roots, the four floods, the ties, the craving/ignorance pair, and the twelve types of unwholesome consciousness. The cumulative effect is to demonstrate that this isn't an isolated grammatical distinction invented for this one formula — it is a structural fault-line that runs through the entire Abhidhamma's map of the mind, always splitting the same way.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
vatthukāma / kilesakāma

object-sense-pleasure / defilement-sense-pleasure — vatthu (a basis, an object) vs. kilesa (a defilement); the canonical twofold division of "sense-pleasure" itself, one external and one internal, that this whole section is built around.

vikkhambhanaviveko

seclusion by suppression — vikkhambhana (suppressing, holding at bay) + viveka (seclusion); one of several kinds of seclusion in the broader tradition, and the specific kind identified as operative in this jhāna formula.

nīvaraṇa

a hindrance — the five obstacles (desire for sensual pleasure, ill will, sloth-and-torpor, restlessness-and-worry, doubt) that this passage pairs one-to-one against the five jhāna factors as their direct opposites.

ogha

a flood — one of several classical fourfold groupings (floods, yokes, taints, clingings) of defilement invoked here as one more lens through which the same object/defilement distinction reappears.

Applied and Sustained Thought

The chapter now turns from the factors the first jhāna has abandoned to the factors it possesses, opening with applied thought and sustained thought — defined precisely, then illustrated through a whole sequence of similes: a struck bell, a bird taking flight, a bee circling a lotus, a bowl being polished, a potter's wheel, and a compass drawing a circle.

Pali Source

Ettāvatā ca paṭhamassa jhānassa pahānaṅgaṃ dassetvā idāni sampayogaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ savitakkaṃ savicārantiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha vitakkanaṃ vitakko, ūhananti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇe cittassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇo, āhananapariyāhananaraso. Tathā hi tena yogāvacaro ārammaṇaṃ vitakkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotīti vuccati. Ārammaṇe cittassa ānayanapaccupaṭṭhāno.

Vicaraṇaṃ vicāro, anusañcaraṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇānumajjanalakkhaṇo, tattha sahajātānuyojanaraso, cittassa anuppabandhanapaccupaṭṭhāno.

Santepi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge oḷārikaṭṭhena pubbaṅgamaṭṭhena ca ghaṇḍābhighāto viya cetaso paṭhamābhinipāto vitakko. Sukhumaṭṭhena anumajjanasabhāvena ca ghaṇḍānuravo viya anuppabandho vicāro. Vipphāravā cettha vitakko paṭhamuppattikāle paripphandanabhūto cittassa ākāse uppatitukāmassa pakkhino pakkhavikkhepo viya padumābhimukhapāto viya ca gandhānubandhacetaso bhamarassa. Santavutti vicāro nātiparipphandanabhāvo cittassa ākāse uppatitassa pakkhino pakkhappasāraṇaṃ viya, paribbhamanaṃ viya ca padumābhimukhapatitassa bhamarassa padumassa uparibhāge. Dukanipātaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana "ākāse gacchato mahāsakuṇassa ubhohi pakkhehi vātaṃ gahetvā pakkhe sannisīdāpetvā gamanaṃ viya ārammaṇe cetaso abhiniropanabhāvena pavatto vitakko. Vātaggahaṇatthaṃ pakkhe phandāpayamānassa gamanaṃ viya anumajjanabhāvena pavatto vicāro"ti vuttaṃ, taṃ anuppabandhena pavattiyaṃ yujjati. So pana nesaṃ viseso paṭhamadutiyajjhānesu pākaṭo hoti.

Apica malaggahitaṃ kaṃsabhājanaṃ ekena hatthena daḷhaṃ gahetvā itarena hatthena cuṇṇatelavālaṇḍupakena parimajjantassa daḷhagahaṇahattho viya vitakko, parimajjanahattho viya vicāro. Tathā kumbhakārassa daṇḍappahārena cakkaṃ bhamayitvā bhājanaṃ karontassa uppīḷanahattho viya vitakko, ito cito ca sañcaraṇahattho viya vicāro. Tathā maṇḍalaṃ karontassa majjhe sannirumbhitvā ṭhitakaṇṭako viya abhiniropano vitakko, bahi paribbhamanakaṇṭako viya anumajjano vicāro. Iti iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena saha vattati rukkho viya pupphena phalena cāti idaṃ jhānaṃ "savitakkaṃ savicāra"nti vuccati. Vibhaṅge pana "iminā ca vitakkena iminā ca vicārena upeto hoti samupeto"tiādinā (vibha. 565) nayena puggalādhiṭṭhānā desanā katā. Attho pana tatrāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.

Vivekajanti ettha vivitti viveko, nīvaraṇavigamoti attho. Vivittoti vā viveko, nīvaraṇavivitto jhānasampayuttadhammarāsīti attho. Tasmā vivekā, tasmiṃ vā viveke jātanti vivekajaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

And with this much, having shown the factor of abandoning belonging to the first jhāna, now, in order to show the factor of association, it was said "accompanied by applied thought, accompanied by sustained thought" and so on. Herein, the applying of the mind is "applied thought"; it is said to be a lifting-up onto the object. This has, as its characteristic, the directing of the mind onto the object; as its function, striking at and all around the object — for thus it is said that, by it, the meditator makes the object "struck by applied thought," "struck all around by applied thought." Its manifestation is the bringing of the mind onto the object.

The moving-about of the mind is "sustained thought"; it is said to be a continued roving. This has, as its characteristic, the repeated pressing upon the object; as its function, the yoking of its co-arisen states to that object; as its manifestation, the sustained connecting of the mind with the object.

And although, in certain cases, the two are never found apart, still, in the sense of being coarser, and of coming first, applied thought is like the striking of a bell — the mind's first, initial descent onto the object. In the sense of being more subtle, and of repeatedly pressing upon the object, sustained thought, with its continued connection, is like the lingering reverberation of the bell. Herein, applied thought, being vibrant at the time of its first arising, is like the wing-beating of a bird wishing to soar up into the sky, or like the swooping-down toward a lotus of a bee whose mind is following the scent. Sustained thought, with its calm occurrence, not greatly agitating, is like the outstretched, gliding wings of a bird already risen into the sky, or like the hovering, circling of a bee, having swooped down toward a lotus, above the lotus. But in the commentary on the Duka-nipāta, it is said: "Applied thought, occurring by way of directing the mind onto the object, is like the flight of a great bird traveling through the sky, which, having caught the wind with both wings, keeps its wings still and glides. Sustained thought, occurring by way of repeatedly pressing upon the object, is like its flight when it flaps its wings in order to catch the wind." This fits with sustained thought's occurring by way of sustained connection. But this distinction between the two becomes evident specifically in the first and second jhānas.

Moreover, for one who takes a tarnished bronze vessel firmly with one hand, and polishes it with the other hand using powder, oil, and a woolen pad — applied thought is like the firmly-holding hand, and sustained thought is like the polishing hand. Likewise, for a potter, having spun the wheel with a stroke of the stick, making a vessel — applied thought is like the pressing hand, and sustained thought is like the hand moving to and fro. Likewise, for one drawing a circle — applied thought, which directs the mind onto the object, is like the compass-pin fixed firmly in the center; sustained thought, which presses repeatedly upon the object, is like the other pin circling around the outside. Thus, this jhāna occurs together with this applied thought and this sustained thought, like a tree together with its flower and fruit; therefore this jhāna is called "accompanied by applied thought, accompanied by sustained thought." But in the Vibhaṅga, the teaching is given from the standpoint of the person, by the method beginning "he is furnished, well furnished, with this applied thought and this sustained thought" (Vibhaṅga 565). But the meaning there too should be understood in just this same way.

As for "born of seclusion": herein, "being secluded" is "seclusion" — the meaning is, the removal of the hindrances. Or, "that which is secluded" is "seclusion" — the meaning being, the mass of states associated with jhāna, secluded from the hindrances. Therefore, "born from seclusion," or "born in that seclusion," is "born of seclusion."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The progression of similes moves deliberately from the coarse to the refined, matching what applied and sustained thought themselves are said to be: a struck bell's initial strike versus its lingering ring, a bird's first burst of wingbeats versus its settled glide, a bee's dive toward a flower versus its hovering circuit above it. Each pair captures the same underlying distinction — an initial, effortful directing of attention onto an object, followed by a steadier, lighter sustaining of contact with it — from a slightly different angle, so that whichever image lands most vividly for a given reader, the conceptual distinction underneath stays exactly the same.

The final three similes (the bowl-polisher's two hands, the potter's two motions, the compass's two pins) shift from sound and flight to tactile, mechanical precision, and are explicit about something the earlier images only implied: applied and sustained thought are not sequential phases but two simultaneous, complementary actions — one holding steady, one working — the way a compass needs both a fixed center pin and a moving outer one to draw a circle at all. Neither factor could do the job alone.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
vitakka / vicāra

applied thought / sustained thought — already met in chapter 3's classification of concentration by jhāna factors; here given their full definitions, characteristics, and the complete sequence of illustrative similes.

abhiniropana

directing, lodging firmly — abhi (toward) + ni (down) + ropana (planting, establishing); the precise characteristic ascribed to applied thought, the initial act of fixing the mind onto its object.

anumajjana

repeated pressing, rubbing over — anu (again, along) + majjana (rubbing, polishing); the characteristic of sustained thought, likened to a polishing hand moving repeatedly over a vessel's surface.

nīvaraṇavigama

the removal of the hindrances — vigama (departure, disappearance); the plain gloss given here for what "seclusion" (viveka) actually consists of in the phrase "born of seclusion."

The Five Kinds of Joy

The chapter now turns to joy itself, distinguishing five distinct grades of intensity — from a mere prickling of the skin to a joy so overwhelming it is said to physically lift the body into the air — illustrated by two remarkable stories: an elder monk and, in even fuller detail, a young laywoman who found herself airborne simply from the force of her own devotion.

Pali Source

Pītisukhanti ettha pīṇayatīti pīti. Sā sampiyāyanalakkhaṇā, kāyacittapīnanarasā, pharaṇarasā vā, odagyapaccupaṭṭhānā. Sā panesā khuddikā pīti, khaṇikāpīti, okkantikāpīti, ubbegāpīti, pharaṇāpītīti pañcavidhā hoti. Tattha khuddikāpīti sarīre lomahaṃsamattameva kātuṃ sakkoti. Khaṇikāpīti khaṇe khaṇe vijjuppādasadisā hoti. Okkantikāpīti samuddatīraṃ vīci viya kāyaṃ okkamitvā okkamitvā bhijjati. Ubbegāpīti balavatī hoti kāyaṃ uddhaggaṃ katvā ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇappattā. Tathā hi puṇṇavallikavāsī mahātissatthero puṇṇamadivase sāyaṃ cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ gantvā candālokaṃ disvā mahācetiyābhimukho hutvā "imāya vata velāya catasso parisā mahācetiyaṃ vandantī"ti pakatiyā diṭṭhārammaṇavasena buddhārammaṇaṃ ubbegāpītiṃ uppādetvā sudhātale pahaṭacitrageṇḍuko viya ākāse uppatitvā mahācetiyaṅgaṇeyeva patiṭṭhāsi. Tathā girikaṇḍakavihārassa upanissaye vattakālakagāme ekā kuladhītāpi balavabuddhārammaṇāya ubbegāpītiyā ākāse laṅghesi.

Tassā kira mātāpitaro sāyaṃ dhammassavanatthāya vihāraṃ gacchantā "amma tvaṃ garubhārā akāle vicarituṃ na sakkosi, mayaṃ tuyhaṃ pattiṃ katvā dhammaṃ sossāmā"ti agamaṃsu. Sā gantukāmāpi tesaṃ vacanaṃ paṭibāhituṃ asakkontī ghare ohīyitvā gharājire ṭhatvā candālokena girikaṇḍake ākāsacetiyaṅgaṇaṃ olokentī cetiyassa dīpapūjaṃ addasa, catasso ca parisā mālāgandhādīhi cetiyapūjaṃ katvā padakkhiṇaṃ karontiyo bhikkhusaṅghassa ca gaṇasajjhāyasaddaṃ assosi. Athassā "dhaññāvatime, ye vihāraṃ gantvā evarūpe cetiyaṅgaṇe anusañcarituṃ, evarūpañca madhuradhammakathaṃ sotuṃ labhantī"ti muttarāsisadisaṃ cetiyaṃ passantiyā eva ubbegāpīti udapādi. Sā ākāse laṅghitvā mātāpitūnaṃ purimataraṃyeva ākāsato cetiyaṅgaṇe oruyha cetiyaṃ vanditvā dhammaṃ suṇamānā aṭṭhāsi. Atha naṃ mātāpitaro āgantvā "amma tvaṃ katarena maggena āgatāsī"ti pucchiṃsu. Sā "ākāsena āgatāmhi, na maggenā"ti vatvā "amma ākāsena nāma khīṇāsavā sañcaranti, tvaṃ kathaṃ āgatā"ti vuttā āha — "mayhaṃ candālokena cetiyaṃ ālokentiyā ṭhitāya buddhārammaṇā balavapīti uppajji. Athāhaṃ neva attano ṭhitabhāvaṃ, na nisinnabhāvaṃ aññāsiṃ, gahitanimitteneva pana ākāse laṅghitvā cetiyaṅgaṇe patiṭṭhitāmhī"ti.

Evaṃ ubbegāpīti ākāse laṅghāpanappamāṇā hoti. Pharaṇāpītiyā pana uppannāya sakalasarīraṃ dhamitvā pūritavatthi viya mahatā udakoghena pakkhandapabbatakucchi viya ca anuparipphuṭaṃ hoti.

Sā panesā pañcavidhā pīti gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhaṃ passaddhiṃ paripūreti kāyapassaddhiñca cittapassaddhiñca. Passaddhi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī paripākaṃ gacchantī duvidhampi sukhaṃ paripūreti kāyikañca cetasikañca. Sukhaṃ gabbhaṃ gaṇhantaṃ paripākaṃ gacchantaṃ tividhaṃ samādhiṃ paripūreti khaṇikasamādhiṃ upacārasamādhiṃ appanā samādhinti. Tāsu yā appanāsamādhissa mūlaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhamānā samādhisampayogaṃ gatā pharaṇāpīti, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā pītīti.

Ru-Yi Translation

As for "joy and happiness": herein, that which gladdens is "joy." It has, as its characteristic, endearing the object to the mind; as its function, either the suffusing of body and mind with gladness, or pervading; and as its manifestation, elation. And this is fivefold: minor joy, momentary joy, showering joy, uplifting joy, and pervading joy. Herein, minor joy is able to raise only the hairs of the body. Momentary joy is like a flash of lightning, moment by moment. Showering joy descends upon the body again and again and breaks, like waves on a seashore. Uplifting joy is powerful; it reaches the point of lifting the body upward and making it leap into the air. For thus the Elder Mahātissa, who dwelt at Puṇṇavallika, having gone to the shrine-courtyard one full-moon evening, and seeing the moonlight, facing toward the Great Shrine, thinking, "at this very hour, the four assemblies are surely worshipping the Great Shrine" — by way of the ordinarily seen object, produced an uplifting joy with the Buddha as its object, and, rising into the air like a painted ball struck on a plastered floor, alighted right in the courtyard of the Great Shrine. Likewise, a certain young woman of good family, in the village of Vattakālaka near Girikaṇḍaka Monastery, also leapt into the air through an uplifting joy, powerful, with the Buddha as its object.

It is said that her parents, going in the evening to the monastery to hear the Dhamma, said: "Daughter, you are heavily burdened; you cannot go about at an improper hour; we shall hear the Dhamma and dedicate the merit to you" — and went. She, though wishing to go, being unable to refuse their words, was left behind at home; standing in the courtyard of the house, looking by moonlight toward the shrine-courtyard in the sky at Girikaṇḍaka, she saw the lamp-offering to the shrine, and heard the four assemblies making offerings to the shrine with garlands and incense and circumambulating it, and the sound of the community of monks reciting together. Then, thinking, "fortunate indeed are those who, having gone to the monastery, are able to walk about in such a shrine-courtyard, and to hear such sweet Dhamma-talk," as she looked at the shrine, resembling a heap of pearls, an uplifting joy arose in her right there. She leapt into the air, and, descending from the sky into the shrine-courtyard even before her parents arrived, paid respects to the shrine and stood listening to the Dhamma. Then her parents, arriving, asked her: "Daughter, by which road did you come?" She said, "I came through the air, not by the road." When asked, "Daughter, it is arahants whose taints are destroyed who travel through the air — how did you come?", she said: "As I stood looking at the shrine by moonlight, a powerful joy with the Buddha as its object arose in me. Then I knew neither that I was standing nor that I was sitting — but, simply by means of the sign I had taken, I leapt into the air and alighted in the shrine-courtyard."

Thus uplifting joy reaches the point of causing one to leap into the air. But when pervading joy has arisen, the entire body becomes suffused throughout, like a bladder blown full of air, or like a mountain cave flooded by a great inrush of water.

And this fivefold joy, taking conception and coming to maturity, fulfills the twofold tranquility — tranquility of body and tranquility of mind. Tranquility, taking conception and coming to maturity, fulfills the twofold happiness as well — bodily and mental. Happiness, taking conception and coming to maturity, fulfills the threefold concentration — momentary concentration, access concentration, and absorption concentration. Among these, it is pervading joy — becoming the root of absorption concentration, growing, and arriving at association with concentration — that is intended by "joy" in this context.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The young laywoman's story is worth reading closely for what it does not claim: she never says she intended to fly, and her own account of the moment is precisely that she "knew neither that I was standing nor that I was sitting" — the leap through the air happened without any deliberate decision to perform it, simply as an involuntary consequence of joy's intensity. Her parents' question assumes flight is the mark of an arahant; her honest, almost bewildered answer corrects that assumption without any claim to attainment on her part, attributing the whole episode purely to the force of devotional joy directed at the Buddha.

The five grades of joy are calibrated by an escalating physical vocabulary — a prickling of the skin, a flash of lightning, breaking waves, a leap into the air, and finally a whole-body saturation like a flooded mountain cave — but the text's real interest lies in what happens next: only the fifth and most complete grade, pervading joy, is identified as the one that actually becomes the root of absorption concentration. The dramatic uplifting joy of the two stories, however striking, is explicitly not the kind the meditator is ultimately cultivating; it is pervading joy's quieter, whole-body saturation that matters for jhāna.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
pīti

joy, rapture — already met in chapter 3's classification of concentration by accompanying feeling; here given its full fivefold breakdown, from the mildest to the most complete grade.

ubbegāpīti

uplifting joy — ubbega (agitation, a surge) + pīti; the fourth and most dramatic grade, powerful enough, in both stories told here, to physically lift the body into the air.

pharaṇāpīti

pervading joy — pharaṇa (pervading, suffusing) + pīti; the fifth and most complete grade, identified as the one that actually becomes the root of absorption concentration.

kuladhītā

a daughter of good family, a young laywoman — kula (family, clan) + dhītā (daughter); the unnamed protagonist of this section's second story, offered without any claim to spiritual attainment on her part.

Joy and Happiness Distinguished, and the Chapter's Closing Definitions

Having described joy in full, the chapter draws a careful line between joy and happiness — related but distinct, like relief at the sight of water in a desert versus the pleasure of actually drinking it — before closing out its word-by-word commentary with the plain definitions of "jhāna," "having attained," and "dwells" themselves.

Pali Source

Itaraṃ pana sukhanaṃ sukhaṃ, suṭṭhu vā khādati, khanati ca kāyacittābādhanti sukhaṃ, taṃ sātalakkhaṇaṃ, sampayuttānaṃ upabrūhanarasaṃ, anuggahapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Satipi ca nesaṃ katthaci avippayoge iṭṭhārammaṇapaṭilābhatuṭṭhi pīti. Paṭiladdharasānubhavanaṃ sukhaṃ. Yattha pīti, tattha sukhaṃ. Yattha sukhaṃ, tattha na niyamato pīti. Saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahitā pīti. Vedanākkhandhasaṅgahitaṃ sukhaṃ. Kantārakhinnassa vanantudakadassanasavanesu viya pīti. Vanacchāyāpavesanaudakaparibhogesu viya sukhaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ samaye pākaṭabhāvato cetaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Iti ayañca pīti idañca sukhaṃ assa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti idaṃ jhānaṃ pītisukhanti vuccati.

Atha vā pīti ca sukhañca pītisukhaṃ, dhammavinayādayo viya. Vivekajaṃ pītisukhamassa jhānassa, asmiṃ vā jhāne atthīti evampi vivekajaṃpītisukhaṃ. Yatheva hi jhānaṃ, evaṃ pītisukhampettha vivekajameva hoti, tañcassa atthi, tasmā ekapadeneva "vivekajaṃpītisukha"ntipi vattuṃ yujjati. Vibhaṅge pana "idaṃ sukhaṃ imāya pītiyā sahagata"ntiādinā (vibha. 567) nayena vuttaṃ. Attho pana tatthāpi evameva daṭṭhabbo.

Paṭhamaṃ jhānanti idaṃ parato āvibhavissati. Upasampajjāti upagantvā, pāpuṇitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upasampādayitvā vā, nipphādetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vibhaṅge pana "upasampajjāti paṭhamassa jhānassa lābho paṭilābho patti sampatti phusanā sacchikiriyā upasampadā"ti vuttaṃ. Tassāpi evamevattho daṭṭhabbo. Viharatīti tadanurūpena iriyāpathavihārena itivuttappakārajhānasamaṅgī hutvā attabhāvassa iriyaṃ vuttiṃ pālanaṃ yapanaṃ yāpanaṃ cāraṃ vihāraṃ abhinipphādeti. Vuttañhetaṃ vibhaṅge "viharatīti iriyati vattati pāleti yapeti yāpeti carati viharati, tena vuccati viharatī"ti (vibha. 540).

Ru-Yi Translation

But the other — happiness — is that which makes beings feel good; or, it thoroughly digs out bodily and mental affliction; hence "happiness." It has, as its characteristic, agreeableness; as its function, the enhancing of its associated states; and as its manifestation, assistance. And although, in some cases, the two are never found apart, joy is the satisfaction at obtaining a desirable object. Happiness is the actual experiencing of the taste of what has been obtained. Where there is joy, there is happiness. But where there is happiness, there is not necessarily joy. Joy is included in the aggregate of mental formations. Happiness is included in the aggregate of feeling. Joy is like the relief of one exhausted in a desert wilderness, on seeing or hearing of water and a shady grove ahead; happiness is like the relief of actually entering the grove's shade and making use of the water. And it should be understood that this was said with reference to what is evident on each such occasion. Thus, since this joy and this happiness belong to this jhāna, or are present in this jhāna, this jhāna is called "joy-and-happiness."

Or else, "joy and happiness" is "joy-happiness," just as "Dhamma and Vinaya" is spoken of as a single compound. "Joy-and-happiness born of seclusion" belongs to this jhāna, or is present in this jhāna — thus too, "joy-and-happiness born of seclusion." For just as the jhāna itself is born of seclusion, so too the joy-and-happiness here is itself born of seclusion, and this belongs to it; therefore it is fitting to speak of it as a single compound word, "joy-and-happiness born of seclusion." But in the Vibhaṅga, it is expressed by the method beginning "this happiness is accompanied by this joy" (Vibhaṅga 567). But the meaning there too should be understood in just this same way.

"The first jhāna": this will become clear further on. "Having attained" means having approached, having reached. Or, having brought about, having accomplished. But in the Vibhaṅga it is said: "'having attained' means the gain, the obtaining, the arrival, the attainment, the touching, the realization, the full attainment of the first jhāna." That too should be understood in just this same way. "Dwells" means: being endowed with the jhāna of the kind just described, through a bearing and mode of living suited to it, he accomplishes the conducting, the carrying on, the maintaining, the sustaining, the keeping going, the faring, and the dwelling of his own existence. For this was said in the Vibhaṅga: "'dwells' means: he conducts himself, carries on, maintains, sustains, keeps going, fares, dwells — therefore it is said, 'he dwells'" (Vibhaṅga 540).

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The desert simile draws the joy/happiness distinction more precisely than any abstract definition could: joy is the surge of relief at merely seeing water ahead, still anticipatory, still oriented toward something not yet possessed; happiness is the different, calmer pleasure of actually drinking it. The text's careful logical note — "where there is joy, there is happiness, but where there is happiness, there is not necessarily joy" — follows directly from this: one can enjoy a already-secured pleasure placidly, without the anticipatory charge that joy specifically supplies, but the reverse is never the case within this jhāna's own field of experience.

The chapter's closing definitions of "having attained" and "dwells" are almost anticlimactic after everything just analyzed — six or seven near-synonyms piled up for each ordinary word — and this is itself characteristic of the aṭṭhakathā method: even the plainest connective language in a canonical formula receives the same systematic treatment as its most technical term, on the principle that no word in the Buddha's own teaching is to be passed over as merely incidental.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
sukha

happiness — given a folk etymology here as su- (good, thorough) + khādati/khanati ("digs out" affliction); distinguished from pīti as belonging to the aggregate of feeling rather than the aggregate of mental formations.

saṅkhārakkhandha / vedanākkhandha

the aggregate of mental formations / the aggregate of feeling — two of the five aggregates; joy is classified under the first, happiness under the second, marking a real Abhidhamma distinction between the two.

upasampadā

full attainment — also the standard term for higher ordination; here glossed, along with several near-synonyms, as the meaning of "having attained" in the jhāna formula.

iriyāpathavihāra

dwelling through a mode of deportment — iriyāpatha (posture, bearing) + vihāra (dwelling); the basis for the chapter's closing gloss on the simple word "dwells," unpacked into seven near-synonymous verbs.

Five Factors Abandoned, Five Factors Possessed

Having worked through the first jhāna formula word by word, the chapter now steps back to name explicitly the five hindrances the first jhāna has abandoned and the five jhāna factors it has come to possess — explaining why each hindrance specifically obstructs jhāna, and why the same five factors, present even at the weaker level of access concentration, only reach their true strength in full absorption.

Pali Source

Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ "pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgata"nti, tattha kāmacchando, byāpādo, thinamiddhaṃ, uddhaccakukkuccaṃ, vicikicchāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānavasena pañcaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Na hi etesu appahīnesu jhānaṃ uppajjati. Tenassetāni pahānaṅgānīti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi hi jhānakkhaṇe aññepi akusalā dhammā pahīyanti, tathāpi etāneva visesena jhānantarāyakarāni. Kāmacchandena hi nānāvisayappalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati. Kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā taṃ na kāmadhātuppahānāya paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati. Byāpādena cārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na nirantaraṃ pavattati. Thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti. Uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati. Vicikicchāya upahataṃ jhānādhigamasādhikaṃ paṭipadaṃ nārohati. Iti visesena jhānantarāyakarattā etāneva "pahānaṅgānī"ti vuttānīti.

Yasmā pana vitakko ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anuppabandhati, tehi avikkhepāya sampāditappayogassa cetaso payogasampattisambhavā pīti pīṇanaṃ, sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti. Atha naṃ sasesasampayuttadhammaṃ etehi abhiniropanānuppabandhanapīṇanaupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā ekattārammaṇe samaṃ sammā ca ādhiyati, tasmā vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ uppattivasena pañcaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Uppannesu hi etesu pañcasu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti. Tenassa etāni pañca "samannāgataṅgānī"ti vuccanti. Tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana aṅgamattavaseneva caturaṅginī senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ, aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggoti vuccati, evamidampi aṅgamattavaseneva pañcaṅgikanti vā pañcaṅgasamannāgatanti vā vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.

Etāni ca pañcaṅgāni kiñcāpi upacārakkhaṇepi atthi, atha kho upacāre pakaticittato balavatarāni. Idha pana upacāratopi balavatarāni rūpāvacaralakkhaṇappattāni. Ettha hi vitakko suvisadena ākārena ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayamāno uppajjati. Vicāro ativiya ārammaṇaṃ anumajjamāno. Pītisukhaṃ sabbāvantampi kāyaṃ pharamānaṃ. Tenevāha — "nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṃ hotī"ti (dī. ni. 1.228). Cittekaggatāpi heṭṭhimamhi samuggapaṭale uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ viya ārammaṇesu phusitā hutvā uppajjati, ayametesaṃ itarehi viseso. Tattha cittekaggatā kiñcāpi savitakkaṃ savicāranti imasmiṃ pāṭhe na niddiṭṭhā, tathāpi vibhaṅge "jhānanti vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā"ti (vibha. 569) evaṃ vuttattā aṅgameva. Yena hi adhippāyena bhagavatā uddeso kato, soyeva tena vibhaṅge pakāsitoti.

Ru-Yi Translation

As for what was said, "having abandoned five factors, possessed of five factors" — herein, the state of having abandoned five factors should be understood by way of the abandoning of these five hindrances: desire for sensual pleasure, ill will, sloth-and-torpor, restlessness-and-worry, and doubt. For jhāna does not arise while these are unabandoned. Therefore these are called its "factors of abandoning." For although, at the moment of jhāna, other unwholesome states are abandoned too, nevertheless it is precisely these that especially create obstacles to jhāna. For a mind enticed by various objects through desire for sensual pleasure does not become concentrated on a single object; or, overpowered by desire for sensual pleasure, it does not enter upon the path for abandoning the sense-desire realm. And, being repelled from its object by ill will, it does not proceed without interruption. Overpowered by sloth-and-torpor, it becomes unworkable. Overcome by restlessness-and-worry, it wanders about, never calmed. Struck by doubt, it does not mount the path that accomplishes the attainment of jhāna. Thus, because they especially create obstacles to jhāna, it is precisely these that are called its "factors of abandoning."

But since applied thought directs the mind onto the object, and sustained thought keeps it connected there, and, because of the accomplishment of undertaking that results from the mind's undertaking being achieved for non-distraction by these two, joy produces gladdening, and happiness produces enhancement — then one-pointedness, together with its remaining associated states, assisted by this directing, this connecting, this gladdening, and this enhancement, settles evenly and properly upon a single object; therefore, the state of being possessed of five factors should be understood by way of the arising of these five: applied thought, sustained thought, joy, happiness, and one-pointedness of mind. For when these five have arisen, jhāna is said to have arisen. Therefore these five are called its "factors of possession." Therefore it should not be understood that jhāna is something else, separate from that which is possessed of these. Rather, just as "a fourfold army," "a five-piece orchestra," and "the eightfold path" are spoken of simply by way of their factors, so too this too should be understood as being called "fivefold" or "possessed of five factors" simply by way of its factors.

And although these five factors exist even at the moment of access, in access they are only somewhat stronger than the ordinary mind. But here, in absorption, they are stronger even than in access, having reached the characteristic of the fine-material sphere. For here, applied thought arises directing the mind onto the object in a thoroughly clear manner. Sustained thought arises pressing upon the object exceedingly. Joy and happiness arise pervading the entire body. For this reason it was said: "there is nothing in his entire body that is not pervaded by the joy and happiness born of seclusion" (D.N. 1.228). One-pointedness of mind, too, arises fitted upon its object like the upper half of a box fitted onto the lower half; this is the distinction of these absorption factors from the others. Herein, although one-pointedness of mind is not specified in this text "accompanied by applied thought, accompanied by sustained thought," nevertheless, since it is said in the Vibhaṅga, "jhāna is applied thought, sustained thought, joy, happiness, one-pointedness of mind" (Vibhaṅga 569), it is indeed a factor. For the very same intention with which the Blessed One gave the summary statement is made clear by him in the analysis.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The explanation of why exactly these five hindrances (and not some other set of unwholesome states) are singled out as jhāna's "factors of abandoning" is precise about mechanism, not just naming a list: each hindrance is shown disabling one-pointedness by a different specific route — desire scatters the mind across multiple objects, ill will repels it from its single object, sloth and torpor make it inert, restlessness keeps it unsettled, and doubt stops it from ever mounting the path at all. The five jhāna factors are shown, in turn, to be structurally paired against these exact five obstacles, which is precisely the mapping the text laid out earlier when analyzing "quite secluded from sense-pleasures."

The box-lid simile for one-pointedness of mind captures something the other four factors' similes don't quite reach: where applied thought, sustained thought, joy, and happiness are each described by their own distinct activity, one-pointedness is described purely by fit — its whole character is simply matching its object so precisely that the two become, in effect, a single sealed unit. And the closing note that one-pointedness counts as a genuine jhāna factor even though the canonical formula never names it directly is a small but real piece of textual reasoning: the commentary cross-checks the Buddha's summary statement against his own more explicit analysis elsewhere, rather than assuming the shorter formula is the complete word on the matter.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
pahānaṅga

a factor of abandoning — pahāna (abandoning) + aṅga (factor); the technical name for the five hindrances specifically in their role as what the first jhāna has overcome.

samannāgataṅga

a factor of possession — the technical name for the five jhāna factors (applied thought, sustained thought, joy, happiness, one-pointedness) in their role as what the first jhāna actively consists of.

akammañña

unworkable, unfit for action — a (not) + kammañña (workable, fit for a task); the specific effect of sloth-and-torpor on the mind, disabling it from productive engagement with its object.

samuggapaṭala

the half of a box or casket — the image behind the simile for one-pointedness of mind, which "fits" its object the way a box's lid fits precisely onto its base.

Good in Three Ways, Endowed with Ten Characteristics

The chapter now closes its analysis of the first jhāna with one of the Visuddhimagga's most structurally elegant passages — a direct quotation from the Paṭisambhidāmagga mapping the jhāna's beginning, middle, and end onto purification, equanimity, and gladdening respectively — followed by the plain closing etymologies of "jhāna" itself and "the earth kasiṇa."

Pali Source

Tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannanti ettha pana ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tividhakalyāṇatā. Tesaṃyeva ca ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena dasalakkhaṇasampannatā veditabbā.

Tatrāyaṃ pāḷi —

"Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa kati lakkhaṇāni? Ādissa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni — yo tassa paribandho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati; visuddhattā cittaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati; paṭipannattā tattha cittaṃ pakkhandati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa paṭipadāvisuddhi ādi, ādissa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ ādikalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca.

"Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Majjhassa tīṇi lakkhaṇāni — visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati; samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati; ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati. Paṭhamassa jhānassa upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe, majjhassa imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ majjhekalyāṇañceva hoti tilakkhaṇasampannañca.

"Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa kati lakkhaṇāni? Pariyosānassa cattāri lakkhaṇāni — tattha jātānaṃ dhammānaṃ anativattanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, indriyānaṃ ekarasaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, tadupagavīriyavāhanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā, āsevanaṭṭhena sampahaṃsanā. Paṭhamassa jhānassa sampahaṃsanā pariyosānaṃ, pariyosānassa imāni cattāri lakkhaṇāni. Tena vuccati paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ pariyosānakalyāṇañceva hoti catulakkhaṇasampannañcā"ti (paṭi. ma. 1.158).

Tatra paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro. Upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā. Sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇāti evameke vaṇṇayanti. Yasmā pana "ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita"nti (paṭi. ma. 1.158) pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā antoappanāyameva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā ca veditabbā.

Kathaṃ? Yasmiñhi vāre appanā uppajjati, tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paribandho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati. Visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva. Tadanantaraṃ pana purimacittaṃ ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattamupagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma, evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimacitte vijjamānākāranipphādikā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva āgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi veditabbā.

Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa puna visodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvupagamanena samathapaṭipannassa puna samādhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathapaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathapaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.

Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tattha jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yañcesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannāva, tasmā "dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbā"ti vuttaṃ.

Tattha yasmā upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Yathāha — "tathāpaggahitaṃ cittaṃ sādhukaṃ ajjhupekkhati, upekkhāvasena paññāvasena paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti, upekkhāvasena nānattakilesehi cittaṃ vimuccati, vimokkhavasena paññāvasena paññindriyaṃ adhimattaṃ hoti. Vimuttattā te dhammā ekarasā honti. Ekarasaṭṭhena bhāvanā"ti (paṭi. ma. 1.201). Tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā pariyosānanti vuttā.

Idāni paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇanti ettha gaṇanānupubbatā paṭhamaṃ, paṭhamaṃ uppannantipi paṭhamaṃ. Ārammaṇūpanijjhānato paccanīkajhāpanato vā jhānaṃ. Pathavīmaṇḍalaṃ pana sakalaṭṭhena pathavīkasiṇanti vuccati, taṃ nissāya paṭiladdhanimittampi, pathavīkasiṇanimitte paṭiladdhajhānampi. Tatra imasmiṃ atthe jhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇanti veditabbaṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ "paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇa"nti.

Ru-Yi Translation

As for "good in three ways, endowed with ten characteristics" — herein, the threefold goodness is by way of the beginning, middle, and end. And the state of being endowed with ten characteristics should be understood by way of the characteristics of these very same three.

Herein, this is the Pāli text —

"Purification of the approach is the beginning of the first jhāna; the fostering of equanimity is the middle; gladdening is the end. Purification of the approach is the beginning of the first jhāna — how many characteristics has the beginning? The beginning has three characteristics: the mind is purified from whatever is its impediment; being purified, the mind enters upon the middling sign of serenity; having entered upon it, the mind launches into it. Purification of the approach is the beginning of the first jhāna; these are the three characteristics of the beginning. Therefore it is said that the first jhāna is good in the beginning, and endowed with three characteristics.

"The fostering of equanimity is the middle of the first jhāna — how many characteristics has the middle? The middle has three characteristics: one looks with equanimity upon the purified mind; one looks with equanimity upon the mind that has entered upon serenity; one looks with equanimity upon its establishment in oneness. The fostering of equanimity is the middle of the first jhāna; these are the three characteristics of the middle. Therefore it is said that the first jhāna is good in the middle, and endowed with three characteristics.

"Gladdening is the end of the first jhāna — how many characteristics has the end? The end has four characteristics: gladdening in the sense that the states that have arisen therein do not overstep one another; gladdening in the sense that the faculties have a single taste; gladdening in the sense of carrying forward the energy appropriate to that; gladdening in the sense of repeated practice. Gladdening is the end of the first jhāna; these are the four characteristics of the end. Therefore it is said that the first jhāna is good in the end, and endowed with four characteristics" (Paṭisambhidāmagga 1.158).

Herein, "purification of the approach" means access together with its requisite conditions. "The fostering of equanimity" means absorption. "Gladdening" means reviewing — thus some explain. But since it is said in the Pāli text, "the mind that has reached oneness has both launched into the purification of the approach, and has been fostered by equanimity, and has been gladdened by knowledge" (Paṭisambhidāmagga 1.158) — therefore, purification of the approach should be understood by way of the approach that occurs within absorption itself; the fostering of equanimity, by way of the function of neutral equanimity there; and gladdening, by way of the accomplishment of the function of the purifying knowledge that brings about the non-overstepping and the rest of the states.

How? For, on the occasion when absorption arises, the mind is purified from that group of defilements reckoned as the hindrances, which is the impediment of that jhāna. Being purified, and free of obstruction, it enters upon the middling sign of serenity. "The middling sign of serenity" means simply absorption concentration itself, occurring evenly. And, immediately after that, the preceding mind, by way of the transformation of a single continuity, arriving at that very state, is said to "enter upon the middling sign of serenity"; having thus entered, by that very arrival, it is said to "launch into it." Thus, first of all, "purification of the approach" should be understood, by way of its coming about, precisely at the moment of the first jhāna's arising, as the accomplishing of a mode already present in the preceding mind.

But, this mind having thus been purified, since there is nothing further for it to be purified of, one who makes no further effort at purifying it is said to "look with equanimity upon the purified mind." One who, the mind having entered the state of serenity, makes no further effort at settling that which has already entered serenity, is said to "look with equanimity upon the mind that has entered upon serenity." And, precisely because of that entry into serenity, for that mind which, having abandoned association with defilement, is established in oneness, one who makes no further effort at producing that establishment in oneness is said to "look with equanimity upon its establishment in oneness." Thus, "the fostering of equanimity" should be understood by way of the function of neutral equanimity.

As for these states, born once equanimity has thus been fostered, reckoned as concentration and understanding — yoked-together states, occurring without overstepping one another; and the faculties of faith and the rest, occurring with a single taste through their being liberated from various defilements; and the energy, appropriate to their state of non-overstepping and single-tastedness, that it carries forward for that purpose; and the repeated practice occurring at that moment — all these modes, since they are accomplished precisely through being thus gladdened, purified, and cleansed by knowledge, having seen the respective dangers and benefits in defilement and purification, therefore it was said: "gladdening should be understood by way of the accomplishment of the function of the purifying knowledge that brings about the non-overstepping and the rest of the states."

Herein, this is so because knowledge becomes evident by way of equanimity. As it is said: "the mind thus exerted looks on well with equanimity; by way of equanimity, by way of understanding, the faculty of understanding becomes predominant; by way of equanimity, the mind is liberated from the various defilements; by way of liberation, by way of understanding, the faculty of understanding becomes predominant. Because of liberation, these states have a single taste. Development is in the sense of a single taste" (Paṭisambhidāmagga 1.201). Therefore, gladdening, consisting in the function of knowledge, was said to be the end.

Now, as to "the first jhāna of the earth kasiṇa has been attained" — herein, "first" means first in the order of counting; it is also "first" in the sense of having arisen first. It is "jhāna" because of close contemplation of its object, or because it burns up its opposing states. But the earth-disc, in the sense of the "whole," is called the "earth kasiṇa"; and, in dependence on it, the sign obtained is also so called, as is the jhāna obtained in the sign of the earth kasiṇa. Herein, in this context, "jhāna" should be understood as "the earth kasiṇa." With reference to that, it was said, "the first jhāna of the earth kasiṇa has been attained."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The threefold structure here is worth noticing as one more instance of a pattern this translation project has met again and again — the treatise's persistent habit of finding beginning/middle/end, or similarly triadic, structure in whatever it examines, down to the level of a single moment of absorption. What makes this particular triad unusually precise is that "middle" here does not mean a passive midpoint between two active endpoints; it is defined entirely as equanimity — the deliberate withholding of further effort once purification has already succeeded, watching without interfering. The middle of the first jhāna is, in this account, the one moment where nothing more needs to be done.

The closing etymology of "jhāna" itself — from contemplating (upanijjhāna) its object, or from burning up (jhāpana) its opposing defilements — offers two readings that are not really in competition: the same word carries both the positive sense of what the mind is doing (steadily regarding its object) and the negative sense of what that steady regard accomplishes (the destruction of the hindrances), consistent with how thoroughly this whole chapter has shown those two descriptions to be two sides of a single event.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
paṭipadāvisuddhi

purification of the approach — paṭipadā (approach, mode of progress) + visuddhi (purification); identified here with access concentration together with its supporting conditions, the "beginning" of the first jhāna.

tatramajjhattupekkhā

neutral, impartial equanimity — tatra (there) + majjhatta (situated in the middle, neutral) + upekkhā (equanimity); the specific kind of equanimity, distinct from the equanimity that later becomes a jhāna factor of the fourth jhāna, that constitutes the "middle" here.

ekarasa

having a single taste — eka (one) + rasa (taste, flavor); describes the faculties (faith, energy, mindfulness, concentration, understanding) once liberated from their respective defilements, all now converging on the same unified quality.

ārammaṇūpanijjhāna / paccanīkajhāpana

close contemplation of the object / burning up of opposing states — the two halves of the classical folk etymology of "jhāna" itself, from jhāyati, "to meditate" or "to burn."

Achieving Lasting Duration

Having attained the first jhāna once, the chapter now turns to a very practical problem — how to make the attainment reliable and lasting rather than a single fleeting success — through the images of a hair-splitting archer and a perceptive royal cook, backed by a full canonical citation, before closing with a warning that reproducing favorable conditions alone is not enough without genuinely purifying the mind of what impedes concentration.

Pali Source

Evamadhigate pana etasmiṃ tena yoginā vālavedhinā viya, sūdena viya ca ākārā pariggahetabbā. Yathā hi sukusalo dhanuggaho vālavedhāya kammaṃ kurumāno yasmiṃ vāre vālaṃ vijjhati, tasmiṃ vāre akkantapadānañca dhanudaṇḍassa ca jiyāya ca sarassa ca ākāraṃ pariggaṇheyya. "Evaṃ me ṭhitena evaṃ dhanudaṇḍaṃ evaṃ jiyaṃ evaṃ saraṃ gahetvā vālo viddho"ti. So tato paṭṭhāya tatheva te ākāre sampādento avirādhetvā vālaṃ vijjheyya. Evameva yogināpi "imaṃ nāma me bhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā evarūpaṃ puggalaṃ sevamānena evarūpe senāsane iminā nāma iriyāpathena imasmiṃ kāle idaṃ adhigata"nti ete bhojanasappāyādayo ākārā pariggahetabbā. Evañhi so naṭṭhe vā tasmiṃ te ākāre sampādetvā puna uppādetuṃ, appaguṇaṃ vā paguṇaṃ karonto punappunaṃ appetuṃ sakkhissati.

Yathā ca kusalo sūdo bhattāraṃ parivisanto tassa yaṃ yaṃ ruciyā bhuñjati, taṃ taṃ sallakkhetvā tato paṭṭhāya tādisameva upanāmento lābhassa bhāgī hoti, evamayampi adhigatakkhaṇe bhojanādayo ākāre gahetvā te sampādento naṭṭhe naṭṭhe punappunaṃ appanāya lābhī hoti. Tasmā tena vālavedhinā viya sūdena viya ca ākārā pariggahetabbā. Vuttampi cetaṃ bhagavatā —

"Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo sūdo rājānaṃ vā rājamahāmattaṃ vā nānaccayehi sūpehi paccupaṭṭhito assa ambilaggehipi tittakaggehipi kaṭukaggehipi madhuraggehipi khārikehipi akhārikehipi loṇikehipi aloṇikehipi. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo sūdo sakassa bhattu nimittaṃ uggaṇhāti 'idaṃ vā me ajja bhattu sūpeyyaṃ ruccati, imassa vā abhiharati, imassa vā bahuṃ gaṇhāti, imassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, ambilaggaṃ vā me ajja bhattu sūpeyyaṃ ruccati, ambilaggassa vā abhiharati, ambilaggassa vā bahuṃ gaṇhāti, ambilaggassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati … pe … aloṇikassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī'ti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo sūdo lābhī ceva hoti acchādanassa, lābhī vetanassa, lābhī abhihārānaṃ. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo sūdo sakassa bhattu nimittaṃ uggaṇhāti. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco paṇḍito byatto kusalo bhikkhu kāye kāyānupassī viharati … pe … vedanāsu vedanā … citte cittā … dhammesu dhammānupassī viharati ātāpī sampajāno satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassaṃ. Tassa dhammesu dhammānupassino viharato cittaṃ samādhiyati, upakkilesā pahīyanti, so taṃ nimittaṃ uggaṇhāti. Sa kho so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo bhikkhu lābhī ceva hoti diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārānaṃ, lābhī satisampajaññassa. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hi so, bhikkhave, paṇḍito byatto kusalo bhikkhu sakassa cittassa nimittaṃ uggaṇhātī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.374).

Nimittaggahaṇena cassa puna te ākāre sampādayato appanāmattameva ijjhati, na ciraṭṭhānaṃ. Ciraṭṭhānaṃ pana samādhiparibandhānaṃ dhammānaṃ suvisodhitattā hoti. Yo hi bhikkhu kāmādīnavapaccavekkhaṇādīhi kāmacchandaṃ na suṭṭhu vikkhambhetvā, kāyapassaddhivasena kāyaduṭṭhullaṃ na suppaṭipassaddhaṃ katvā, ārambhadhātumanasikārādivasena thinamiddhaṃ na suṭṭhu paṭivinodetvā, samathanimittamanasikārādivasena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ na susamūhataṃ katvā, aññepi samādhiparibandhe dhamme na suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so avisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya avisuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca khippameva nikkhamati. Yo pana samādhiparibandhe dhamme suṭṭhu visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjati, so suvisodhitaṃ āsayaṃ paviṭṭhabhamaro viya suparisuddhaṃ uyyānaṃ paviṭṭharājā viya ca sakalampi divasabhāgaṃ antosamāpattiyaṃyeva hoti. Tenāhu porāṇā —

"Kāmesu chandaṃ paṭighaṃ vinodaye,
Uddhaccamiddhaṃ vicikicchapañcamaṃ;
Vivekapāmojjakarena cetasā,
Rājāva suddhantagato tahiṃ rame"ti.

Tasmā ciraṭṭhitikāmena paribandhakadhamme visodhetvā jhānaṃ samāpajjitabbaṃ. Cittabhāvanāvepullatthañca yathāladdhaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Tassa dve vaḍḍhanābhūmiyo upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā. Upacāraṃ patvāpi hi taṃ vaḍḍhetuṃ vaṭṭati appanaṃ patvāpi. Ekasmiṃ pana ṭhāne avassaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ "yathāladdhaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ vaḍḍhetabba"nti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Now, once this has been attained, the meditator should take note of the conditions, like a hair-splitting archer, and like a cook. For just as a highly skilled archer, performing the feat of hair-splitting, on the occasion when he splits the hair, would take note of the position of his planted feet, and of the bow-stick, the bowstring, and the arrow, thinking, "standing thus, holding the bow-stick thus, the bowstring thus, the arrow thus, the hair was split" — and, from then on, reproducing those same conditions exactly, would split the hair without fail — just so, the meditator too should take note of these conditions, such as suitable food and the rest, thinking, "having eaten this particular food, associating with this kind of person, in this kind of dwelling, by means of this posture, at this time, this was attained." For thus, should that attainment be lost, he will be able, by reproducing those conditions, to produce it again; or, making what is not yet mastered mastered, to enter absorption again and again.

And just as a skilled cook, serving his master, noting exactly which dishes he eats with relish, and from then on offering just such dishes, becomes the recipient of reward — so too this meditator, having noted the conditions such as food and the rest at the moment of attainment, and reproducing them, becomes one who gains absorption again and again, whenever it is lost. Therefore the conditions should be noted by him, like a hair-splitting archer, and like a cook. And this was said by the Blessed One —

"Suppose, monks, a wise, competent, skilled cook were to serve a king or a king's chief minister with various curries — sour ones, bitter ones, pungent ones, sweet ones, alkaline ones, non-alkaline ones, salty ones, and non-salty ones. That wise, competent, skilled cook, monks, picks up the signs from his own master: 'today this curry pleases my master,' or 'he reaches for this one,' or 'he takes much of this one,' or 'he speaks in praise of this one'; 'today the sour curry pleases my master,' or 'he reaches for the sour one,' or 'he takes much of the sour one,' or 'he speaks in praise of the sour one' ... or 'he speaks in praise of the non-salty one.' That wise, competent, skilled cook, monks, becomes one who gains clothing, gains wages, gains gifts. Why is that? Because, monks, that wise, competent, skilled cook picks up the signs from his own master. Just so, monks, here some wise, competent, skilled monk dwells contemplating the body in the body ... contemplating feelings in feelings ... contemplating mind in mind ... contemplating states in states, ardent, clearly comprehending, mindful, having removed covetousness and grief in regard to the world. As he dwells contemplating states in states, his mind becomes concentrated, the defilements are abandoned, and he picks up that sign. That wise, competent, skilled monk, monks, becomes one who gains pleasant abidings here and now, one who gains mindfulness and clear comprehension. Why is that? Because, monks, that wise, competent, skilled monk picks up the sign of his own mind" (S.N. 5.374).

But, by his taking up the sign in this way, and reproducing those conditions again, only the mere re-attainment of absorption is accomplished, not its lasting duration. But lasting duration comes about through the thorough purification of the states that impede concentration. For whatever monk, without properly suppressing desire for sensual pleasure through reflecting on the danger in sense-pleasures and the rest, without thoroughly calming bodily unwieldiness through bodily tranquility, without properly dispelling sloth-and-torpor through attention to the element of initiative and the rest, without thoroughly rooting out restlessness-and-worry through attention to the sign of serenity and the rest, and without thoroughly purifying the other states that impede concentration, enters upon jhāna — he, like a bee entering an unpurified hive, or like a king entering an unclean park, comes out again very quickly. But whoever, having thoroughly purified the states that impede concentration, enters upon jhāna — he, like a bee entering a well-purified hive, or like a king entering a thoroughly clean park, remains within the attainment for the entire portion of the day. For this the ancients said —

Let one dispel desire for sense-pleasures and ill will, restlessness and torpor, and doubt as the fifth; with a mind that produces the gladness of seclusion, let one delight there, like a king who has entered his own inner chambers, purified.

Therefore, one who desires lasting duration should purify the impeding states and then enter upon jhāna. And, for the sake of the fullness of the mind's development, the counterpart-sign, once obtained, should be expanded. There are two stages for its expansion: access, or absorption. For it is proper to expand it either upon reaching access, or upon reaching absorption. But at one point or the other, it must certainly be expanded. For this reason it was said, "the counterpart-sign, once obtained, should be expanded."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The archer and cook similes make an identical point from two very different social positions — one solitary and self-directed, one entirely in service of another's taste — and together they establish that noting the specific conditions of a success is not superstition but disciplined attentiveness: the archer does not merely hope to repeat his feat, he consciously catalogs the stance, the grip, the draw that produced it. Applied to jhāna, this reframes something that might look like ritual (eating a certain food, keeping certain company) as ordinary causal reasoning: if a specific combination of conditions produced concentration once, reproducing that same combination is a rational way to try to produce it again.

But the passage's real point comes in its final turn, which explicitly limits what condition-reproduction can achieve: it can help a lost jhāna be regained, but it cannot by itself make a jhāna last. Duration depends on something the archer/cook method cannot supply — the actual, thorough purification of the mind from the hindrances, not merely arranging favorable external circumstances. The bee-in-an-unclean-hive and king-in-an-unclean-park similes make the point vividly: even a technically successful entry into jhāna will not hold if the underlying "residence" itself has not been properly cleaned.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
vālavedhī

a hair-splitting archer — vāla (a hair) + vedhī (a piercer, splitter); a byword in Pāli literature for the highest level of precision skill, invoked here as the model for tracking the exact conditions of an attainment.

kāyaduṭṭhulla

bodily unwieldiness, coarseness of body — duṭṭhulla (coarse, gross); one of the specific obstacles to lasting concentration, calmed specifically through bodily tranquility (kāyapassaddhi).

suddhanta

the inner chambers, the private apartments [of a king] — suddha (pure) + anta (end, inner part); the image in the closing verse for the purified mind a meditator delights within, once every impediment has been cleared.

vaḍḍhanābhūmi

a stage of expansion — vaḍḍhana (growing, expanding) + bhūmi (stage, plane); the two points, access or absorption, at which the counterpart-sign may properly be expanded.

Expanding the Sign by Careful Degrees

The chapter now gives the precise method for expanding the counterpart-sign — never all at once, but marked out and grown by careful stages, like a farmer plowing within marked boundaries or young geese gradually extending their flights — and warns, through a vivid canonical simile of an inexperienced mountain-cow, against rushing toward the second jhāna before the first has been genuinely mastered.

Pali Source

Tatrāyaṃ vaḍḍhananayo, tena yoginā taṃ nimittaṃ pattavaḍḍhanapūvavaḍḍhanabhattavaḍḍhanalatāvaḍḍhanadussavaḍḍhanayogena avaḍḍhetvā yathā nāma kassako kasitabbaṭṭhānaṃ naṅgalena paricchinditvā paricchedabbhantare kasati, yathā vā pana bhikkhū sīmaṃ bandhantā paṭhamaṃ nimittāni sallakkhetvā pacchā bandhanti, evameva tassa yathāladdhassa nimittassa anukkamena ekaṅguladvaṅgulativaṅgulacaturaṅgulamattaṃ manasā paricchinditvā yathāparicchedaṃ vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Aparicchinditvā pana na vaḍḍhetabbaṃ. Tato vidatthiratanapamukhapariveṇavihārasīmānaṃ gāmanigamajanapadarajjasamuddasīmānañca paricchedavasena vaḍḍhayantena cakkavāḷaparicchedena vā tato vāpi uttari paricchinditvā vaḍḍhetabbaṃ.

Yathā hi haṃsapotakā pakkhānaṃ uṭṭhitakālato paṭṭhāya parittaṃ parittaṃ padesaṃ uppatantā paricayaṃ katvā anukkamena candimasūriyasantikaṃ gacchanti, evameva bhikkhu vuttanayena nimittaṃ paricchinditvā vaḍḍhento yāva cakkavāḷaparicchedā tato vā uttari vaḍḍheti. Athassa taṃ nimittaṃ vaḍḍhitavaḍḍhitaṭṭhāne pathaviyā ukkūlavikūlanadīviduggapabbatavisamesu saṅkusatasamabbhāhataṃ usabhacammaṃ viya hoti.

Tasmiṃ pana nimitte pattapaṭhamajjhānena ādikammikena samāpajjanabahulena bhavitabbaṃ, na paccavekkhaṇabahulena. Paccavekkhaṇabahulassa hi jhānaṅgāni thūlāni dubbalāni hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Athassa tāni evaṃ upaṭṭhitattā upari ussukkanāya paccayataṃ āpajjanti. So appaguṇe jhāne ussukkamāno pattapaṭhamajjhānā ca parihāyati, na ca sakkoti dutiyaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Tenāha bhagavā —

"Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, gāvī pabbateyyā bālā abyattā akhettaññū akusalā visame pabbate carituṃ. Tassā evamassa 'yaṃnūnāhaṃ agatapubbañceva disaṃ gaccheyyaṃ, akhāditapubbāni ca tiṇāni khādeyyaṃ, apītapubbāni ca pānīyāni piveyya'nti. Sā purimaṃ pādaṃ na supatiṭṭhitaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā pacchimaṃ pādaṃ uddhareyya, sā na ceva agatapubbaṃ disaṃ gaccheyya, na ca akhāditapubbāni tiṇāni khādeyya, na ca apītapubbāni pānīyāni piveyya. Yasmiñcassā padese ṭhitāya evamassa 'yaṃnūnāhaṃ agatapubbañceva … pe … piveyya'nti. Tañca padesaṃ na sotthinā paccāgaccheyya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Tathā hi sā, bhikkhave, gāvī pabbateyyā bālā abyattā akhettaññū akusalā visame pabbate carituṃ. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, idhekacco bhikkhu bālo abyatto akhettaññū akusalo vivicceva kāmehi … pe … paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. So taṃ nimittaṃ nāsevati, na bhāveti, na bahulīkaroti, na svādhiṭṭhitaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, tassa evaṃ hoti 'yaṃnūnāhaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā … pe … dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyya'nti. So na sakkoti vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā … pe … dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Tassevaṃ hoti 'yaṃnūnāhaṃ vivicceva kāmehi … pe … paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja vihareyya'nti. So na sakkoti vivicceva kāmehi … pe … paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharituṃ. Ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ubhato bhaṭṭho ubhato parihīno, seyyathāpi sā gāvī pabbateyyā bālā abyattā akhettaññū akusalā visame pabbate caritu"nti (a. ni. 9.35).

Tasmānena tasmiṃyeva tāva paṭhamajjhāne pañcahākārehi ciṇṇavasinā bhavitabbaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, this is the method of expansion: the meditator, not expanding that sign by the method of expanding a bowl of dough, a cake, a meal-portion, a creeper, or a piece of cloth — but, just as a farmer, having marked out with a plow the area to be plowed, plows within that marked boundary; or just as monks, establishing a monastic boundary, first note the boundary-marks and only afterward establish it — just so, having mentally marked out the sign, once obtained, by degrees, to the extent of one finger-width, two finger-widths, three finger-widths, four finger-widths, should expand it according to that marking. But it should not be expanded without such marking out. From there, expanding it by way of the boundary of a span, a cubit, and so up to the boundary of a monastery-cell, a monastery, a village, a market-town, a district, a kingdom, the ocean — or, marking it out even by the boundary of the surrounding mountain-ring of the world-system or beyond that, it should be expanded.

For just as young geese, from the time their wings have grown, flying over small areas at first, gradually gaining practice, in due course go near the sun and moon — just so a monk, marking out the sign by the method stated and expanding it, expands it up to the boundary of the surrounding mountain-ring, or beyond that. Then, as that sign is expanded further and further, it becomes, in places on the earth that are uneven, cut by rivers, difficult terrain, and mountains, like a bull's hide stretched flat by a hundred pegs.

But regarding that sign, a beginner who has attained the first jhāna should devote himself much to entering the attainment, not much to reviewing it. For, to one who reviews it too much, the jhāna factors appear coarse and weak. Then, these, appearing thus, become a condition for premature eagerness toward what is higher. He, being eager for a jhāna not yet mastered, both falls away from the first jhāna already attained, and is unable to reach the second. For this reason the Blessed One said —

"Suppose, monks, there is a mountain-cow, foolish, inexperienced, unfamiliar with the terrain, unskilled at walking on uneven mountain ground. She might think: 'What if I were to go to a direction I have never gone before, and eat grass I have never eaten before, and drink water I have never drunk before?' She, without having planted her front foot securely, might lift her back foot; she would then neither go to the direction never gone before, nor eat the grass never eaten before, nor drink the water never drunk before. And that spot, too, where she was standing when she thought, 'what if I were to go ... drink,' even that spot she might not return to safely. Why is that? Because, monks, that mountain-cow is foolish, inexperienced, unfamiliar with the terrain, unskilled at walking on uneven mountain ground. Just so, monks, here some monk is foolish, inexperienced, unfamiliar with the terrain, unskilled at dwelling, quite secluded from sense-pleasures ... having attained the first jhāna. He does not resort to that sign, does not develop it, does not cultivate it much, does not well establish himself in it; and yet it occurs to him: 'what if, with the stilling of applied and sustained thought, ... I were to attain and dwell in the second jhāna?' He is unable, with the stilling of applied and sustained thought, ... to attain and dwell in the second jhāna. It occurs to him: 'what if I were to attain and dwell in the first jhāna, quite secluded from sense-pleasures ...?' He is unable to attain and dwell in the first jhāna, quite secluded from sense-pleasures ... This monk, monks, is called one fallen from both, declined from both — just like that mountain-cow, foolish, inexperienced, unfamiliar with the terrain, unskilled at walking on uneven mountain ground" (A.N. 9.35).

Therefore, one should first become skilled, by way of the five kinds of mastery, in that very first jhāna.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The bull's-hide image at the end of the expansion instructions is a striking way to describe what a fully expanded kasiṇa sign accomplishes: the meditator's mental object comes to smooth over every irregularity of the actual landscape — riverbanks, ravines, uneven mountain terrain — the way a hide stretched taut by a hundred pegs presents a single continuous, unbroken surface. The sign's growth is not merely getting bigger; it is achieving a uniformity that the physical world underneath it does not actually have.

The mountain-cow simile is one of the sharper warnings in this whole chapter: the cow's fatal mistake is not incompetence at either staying put or exploring, but attempting the harder, unfamiliar terrain before securing her footing on the terrain she already knows — and even the safe ground she started from is no longer guaranteed to her once she has moved carelessly. Applied to jhāna, the parallel is exact: a meditator who reaches eagerly for the second jhāna without having thoroughly mastered the first risks losing access to both, exactly the "fallen from both" fate the canonical text names directly.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
cakkavāḷa

the surrounding mountain-ring — the ring of mountains held, in traditional Buddhist cosmology, to encircle a world-system; named here as one of the outer limits to which the kasiṇa sign may be expanded.

haṃsapotaka

a young goose or swan — haṃsa (goose, swan) + potaka (a young one); the image for gradual, disciplined expansion of ability, flying farther only as practice accumulates.

ussukkanā

eagerness, premature striving — the specific fault this section warns against: reaching for a higher jhāna before the current one is genuinely stable, driven by an unfavorable comparison made through excessive reviewing.

ubhato bhaṭṭho

fallen from both — bhaṭṭha (fallen, lost); the canonical description, quoted directly here, of a meditator who loses both the jhāna already attained and the one prematurely sought.

The Five Kinds of Mastery

Before advancing to the second jhāna, the chapter names the five specific skills a meditator should develop within the first — mastery in adverting, attaining, resolving on duration, emerging, and reviewing — illustrated by the Buddha's own instantaneous mastery at the Twin Miracle, Mahāmoggallāna's swift subduing of a nāga-king, and the story of the Elder Buddharakkhita, whose speed in both entering and emerging from an attainment saved thirty thousand monks from disaster.

Pali Source

Tatrimā pañca vasiyo — āvajjanavasī, samāpajjanavasī, adhiṭṭhānavasī, vuṭṭhānavasī, paccavekkhaṇavasīti. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ yatthicchakaṃ yadicchakaṃ yāvadicchakaṃ āvajjeti, āvajjanāya dandhāyitattaṃ natthīti āvajjanavasī. Paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ yatthicchakaṃ … pe … samāpajjati, samāpajjanāya dandhāyitattaṃ natthīti samāpajjanavasī. Evaṃ sesāpi vitthāretabbā.

Ayaṃ panettha atthappakāsanā, paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya paṭhamaṃ vitakkaṃ āvajjayato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti. Tato dve bhavaṅgāni, tato puna vicārārammaṇaṃ āvajjanaṃ, vuttanayāneva javanānīti evaṃ pañcasu jhānaṅgesu yadā nirantaraṃ cittaṃ pesetuṃ sakkoti, athassa āvajjanavasī siddhā hoti. Ayaṃ pana matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriye labbhati, aññesaṃ vā evarūpe kāle. Ito paraṃ sīghatarā āvajjanavasī nāma natthi.

Āyasmato pana mahāmoggallānassa nandopanandanāgarājadamane viya sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī nāma.

Accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā khaṇaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tatheva lahuṃ vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tadubhayadassanatthaṃ buddharakkhitattherassa vatthuṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭati.

So hāyasmā upasampadāya aṭṭhavassiko hutvā therambatthale mahārohaṇaguttattherassa gilānupaṭṭhānaṃ āgatānaṃ tiṃsamattānaṃ iddhimantasahassānaṃ majjhe nisinno therassa yāguṃ paṭiggāhayamānaṃ upaṭṭhākanāgarājānaṃ gahessāmīti ākāsato pakkhandantaṃ supaṇṇarājānaṃ disvā tāvadeva pabbataṃ nimminitvā nāgarājānaṃ bāhāyaṃ gahetvā tattha pāvisi. Supaṇṇarājā pabbate pahāraṃ datvā palāyi. Mahāthero āha — "sace, āvuso, buddharakkhito nābhavissa, sabbeva gārayhā assāmā"ti.

Paccavekkhaṇavasī pana āvajjanavasiyā eva vuttā. Paccavekkhaṇajavanāneva hi tattha āvajjanānantarānīti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, these are the five masteries: mastery in adverting, mastery in attaining, mastery in resolving, mastery in emerging, and mastery in reviewing. "Mastery in adverting" means: he averts to the first jhāna wherever he wishes, whenever he wishes, for as long as he wishes, and there is no sluggishness in the adverting. "Mastery in attaining" means: he attains the first jhāna wherever he wishes ..., and there is no sluggishness in the attaining. The remaining three should be elaborated in the same way.

But this, herein, is the explanation of the meaning: for one who, having emerged from the first jhāna, adverts first to applied thought, immediately after the adverting-consciousness that has arisen by interrupting the life-continuum, four or five impulsion-consciousnesses run their course, having applied thought itself as their object. Then two moments of the life-continuum; then, again, an adverting-consciousness having sustained thought as its object, and impulsions in the same way as stated — thus, when one is able to send the mind without interruption through all five jhāna factors in turn, then his mastery in adverting is accomplished. But this mastery, having reached its culmination, is found in the Blessed One at the time of the Twin Miracle, or in others on such an occasion. There is no mastery in adverting swifter than this.

"Mastery in attaining" means the ability to attain swiftly, as in the case of the Venerable Mahāmoggallāna's taming of the nāga-king Nandopananda.

"Mastery in resolving" means the ability to fix the duration of the attainment for the space of a finger-snap, or for the space of ten finger-snaps. "Mastery in emerging" means, likewise, the ability to emerge quickly. To illustrate both of these, it is fitting to tell the story of the Elder Buddharakkhita.

That venerable one, being eight years since his higher ordination, was sitting at Therambatthala in the midst of thirty thousand possessors of psychic power who had come to attend upon the sick Elder Mahārohaṇagutta; and, seeing a garuḍa-king swooping down from the sky, thinking, "I will seize the attendant nāga-king who is receiving the elder's rice-gruel," he immediately created a mountain, took the nāga-king by the arm, and entered it with him. The garuḍa-king struck the mountain and fled. The great elder said: "Friends, if Buddharakkhita had not been here, we would all have been blameworthy."

But mastery in reviewing has already been explained under mastery in adverting. For the reviewing-impulsions there are simply those that immediately follow the adverting.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The five masteries reframe jhāna attainment as something closer to a trained physical skill than a spontaneous mystical event: the emphasis throughout is on speed, reliability, and control — being able to enter, sustain for a chosen duration, and exit an absorption exactly when and where one wishes, without hesitation. The Buddha's mastery at the Twin Miracle is offered as the theoretical ceiling of this skill, not because ordinary meditators are expected to reach it, but to give the scale against which every other example is implicitly measured.

The Buddharakkhita story is worth noting for how understated its climax is: an elder monk, mid-attendance on a sick colleague, instantly creates a mountain and rescues a nāga-king from a garuḍa's attack, purely through the speed of his mastery in attaining and emerging — and the only commentary offered is another elder's brief, dry remark that everyone present would have been "blameworthy" without him. The drama of the rescue itself is treated as simply a demonstration of the skill being defined, not as the point of the story.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
vasī

mastery, control — from vasa (power, control); the organizing term for this section's five specific skills, each defined by speed and reliability rather than by depth of attainment alone.

yamakapāṭihāriya

the Twin Miracle — yamaka (twin, paired) + pāṭihāriya (a miracle); the canonical feat in which the Buddha simultaneously emitted fire and water from his body, cited here as the theoretical peak of mastery in adverting.

accharā

a finger-snap — the traditional unit for an extremely brief moment of time, used here as the measure for the shortest duration a meditator with mastery in resolving can fix an attainment to.

supaṇṇa

a garuḍa, a mythical bird — the traditional predator of nāgas (serpent-beings) in Indian and Buddhist cosmology, the threat the Elder Buddharakkhita's speed of mastery allowed him to counter instantly.

The Second Jhāna: Attainment and Formula

Having become skilled in the five masteries within the first jhāna, the meditator now turns to the second. The chapter describes the same disciplined procedure already used for the first attainment — seeing danger in what has been gained, bringing the higher state to mind as peaceful, and exhausting the lingering relish for what came before — before giving the second jhāna's own formula and its abbreviated factor-count.

Pali Source

Imāsu pana pañcasu vasīsu ciṇṇavasinā paguṇapaṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya "ayaṃ samāpatti āsannanīvaraṇapaccatthikā, vitakkavicārānaṃ oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā"ti ca tattha dosaṃ disvā dutiyajjhānaṃ santato manasikatvā paṭhamajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya dutiyādhigamāya yogo kātabbo. Athassa yadā paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya satassa sampajānassa jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhato vitakkavicārā oḷārikato upaṭṭhahanti, pītisukhañceva cittekaggatā ca santato upaṭṭhāti, tadāssa oḷārikaṅgaṃ pahānāya santaaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ "pathavī pathavī"ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto "idāni dutiyajjhānaṃ uppajjissatī"ti bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā tadeva pathavīkasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tato tasmiṃyevārammaṇe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti, yesamavasāne ekaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ dutiyajjhānikaṃ. Sesāni vuttappakārāneva kāmāvacarānīti.

Ettāvatā cesa vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā ajjhattaṃ sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ samādhijaṃ pītisukhaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Evamanena dvaṅgavippahīnaṃ tivaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ dutiyaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Now, for one who has mastered these five masteries, having emerged from the first jhāna made familiar, and having seen the danger there — "this attainment has the hindrances as its near enemies, and its factors are weak owing to the grossness of applied and sustained thought" — and having brought to mind the second jhāna as peaceful, effort should be made for the attainment of the second by exhausting the relish for the first jhāna. Then, when — emerging from the first jhāna, mindful and fully aware, reviewing the jhāna factors — applied and sustained thought appear to him as gross, while joy, happiness, and unification of mind appear as peaceful, then, for the abandoning of the gross factor and the acquiring of the peaceful factor, as he brings that very sign repeatedly to mind, thinking "earth, earth," thinking "now the second jhāna will arise," the life-continuum is interrupted and a mind-door adverting-consciousness arises taking that very earth kasiṇa as its object. Then, in that same object, four or five impulsion-consciousnesses run their course, at the end of which one belongs to the fine-material sphere, of the second jhāna; the rest are of the sense sphere, of the kind already stated.

By this much he enters upon and dwells in the second jhāna, which has the stilling of applied and sustained thought, internal confidence, unification of mind, is without applied thought, without sustained thought, is born of concentration, and is filled with joy and happiness. Thus is attained by him the second jhāna on the earth kasiṇa, which has abandoned two factors, is possessed of three factors, is good in three ways, and endowed with the ten characteristics.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The procedure for reaching the second jhāna is described in exactly the same terms as the procedure for reaching the first — the same seeing of danger, the same bringing of the higher state to mind as peaceful, the same exhausting of relish, the same interruption of the life-continuum by a mind-door adverting-consciousness, the same run of four or five impulsions. The text signals this economy explicitly by saying the remaining consciousnesses are simply "of the kind already stated" rather than describing them afresh. This is the chapter functioning exactly as its own later cross-references will require it to function for the other thirty-nine meditation subjects: once a mechanism has been established in full, it is invoked by name rather than repeated.

The factor-count itself now begins to contract in a way that will continue through the remaining jhānas: the first jhāna was "endowed with five factors" (applied thought, sustained thought, joy, happiness, unification of mind), while the second is described as having "abandoned two factors" (applied and sustained thought) and being "possessed of three" (joy, happiness, unification of mind). This bookkeeping of what is abandoned versus what remains is the framework within which every subsequent jhāna will be defined.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
nikanti

relish, clinging attachment — the specific pull toward a jhāna already attained that must be exhausted before a higher jhāna can be reached; distinct from the coarser sense-desire abandoned to reach the first jhāna at all.

oḷārika / santa

gross / peaceful — the recurring analytical pair by which a meditator judges any two adjacent states: the factor being left behind is seen as coarse, the factor being approached as calmer, driving the motivation to advance.

dvaṅgavippahīna / tivaṅgasamannāgata

having abandoned two factors / possessed of three factors — the second jhāna's factor-formula, dropping applied and sustained thought while retaining joy, happiness, and unification of mind from the first jhāna's five.

paccavekkhato

reviewing, examining — present participle from paccavekkhati; the mental act, distinct from mere emerging, by which a meditator inspects the jhāna factors just experienced and judges some gross and others peaceful.

The Second Jhāna: Confidence and Unification of Mind

The chapter now turns to its word-by-word commentary on the second jhāna's formula, beginning with why "the stilling of applied and sustained thought" is the frame for everything that follows, then unpacking "internal confidence" and "unification of mind" through their etymology, and finally answering an implicit objection — why these two qualities, which are technically present even in the first jhāna, are named here for the first time.

Pali Source

Tattha vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti vitakkassa ca vicārassa cāti imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vūpasamā samatikkamā, dutiyajjhānakkhaṇe apātubhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha kiñcāpi dutiyajjhāne sabbepi paṭhamajjhānadhammā na santi. Aññeyeva hi paṭhamajjhāne phassādayo, aññe idha. Oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamo hotīti dīpanatthaṃ "vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā"ti evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Ajjhattanti idha niyakajjhattamadhippetaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana "ajjhattaṃ paccatta"nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca niyakajjhattamadhippetaṃ, tasmā attani jātaṃ attano santāne nibbattanti ayamettha attho. Sampasādananti sampasādanaṃ vuccati saddhā. Sampasādanayogato jhānampi sampasādanaṃ. Nīlavaṇṇayogato nīlavatthaṃ viya. Yasmā vā taṃ jhānaṃ sampasādanasamannāgatattā vitakkavicārakkhobhavūpasamanena ca cetaso sampasādayati, tasmāpi sampasādananti vuttaṃ. Imasmiñca atthavikappe sampasādanaṃ cetasoti evaṃ padasambandho veditabbo. Purimasmiṃ pana atthavikappe cetasoti etaṃ ekodibhāvena saddhiṃ yojetabbaṃ.

Tatrāyamatthayojanā, eko udetīti ekodi, vitakkavicārehi anajjhārūḷhattā aggo seṭṭho hutvā udetīti attho. Seṭṭhopi hi loke ekoti vuccati. Vitakkavicāravirahato vā eko asahāyo hutvā itipi vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Atha vā sampayuttadhamme udāyatīti udi, uṭṭhāpetīti attho. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena eko ca so udi cāti ekodi, samādhissetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Iti imaṃ ekodiṃ bhāveti vaḍḍhetīti idaṃ dutiyajjhānaṃ ekodibhāvaṃ. So panāyaṃ ekodi yasmā cetaso, na sattassa, na jīvassa, tasmā etaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvanti vuttaṃ.

Nanu cāyaṃ saddhā paṭhamajjhānepi atthi, ayañca ekodināmako samādhi, atha kasmā idameva "sampasādanaṃ cetaso ekodibhāvañcā"ti vuttanti. Vuccate, aduñhi paṭhamajjhānaṃ vitakkavicārakkhobhena vīcitaraṅgasamākulamiva jalaṃ na suppasannaṃ hoti, tasmā satiyāpi saddhāya "sampasādana"nti na vuttaṃ. Na suppasannattāyeva cettha samādhipi na suṭṭhu pākaṭo, tasmā "ekodibhāva"ntipi na vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana jhāne vitakkavicārapalibodhābhāvena laddhokāsā balavatī saddhā, balavasaddhāsahāyapaṭilābheneva ca samādhipi pākaṭo, tasmā idameva evaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Vibhaṅge pana "sampasādananti yā saddhā saddahanā okappanā abhippasādo. Cetaso ekodibhāvanti yā cittassa ṭhiti…pe… sammāsamādhī"ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Evaṃ vuttena pana tena saddhiṃ ayamatthavaṇṇanā yathā na virujjhati, aññadatthu saṃsandati ceva sameti ca, evaṃ veditabbā.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought" means: with the stilling, the surmounting, of these two — applied thought and sustained thought — that is, their non-occurrence at the moment of the second jhāna. Herein, although it is true that not all the states of the first jhāna are present in the second jhāna — for the contact and so on of the first jhāna are one thing, and those here are another — nevertheless it should be understood that it was said thus, "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought," in order to show that the attainment of the second jhāna and the rest, beyond the first jhāna, comes about through the surmounting of each one's own gross factor.

Herein, "internal" means what is intended is the personal internal, one's own. But in the Vibhaṅga only this much is said: "internal, individual." And since what is intended is the personal internal, the meaning here is: arisen in oneself, produced in one's own continuity. As for "confidence" — sampasādana is said to mean faith. Because it is conjoined with confidence, the jhāna too is called "confidence," just as a blue cloth is called blue because it is conjoined with the color blue. Or else, because that jhāna, being endowed with confidence, and through the stilling of the disturbance of applied and sustained thought, gives confidence to the mind, it is for that reason too called "confidence." And in this construal of the meaning, the word-connection should be understood as "confidence of mind." But in the former construal, this word "of mind" should be construed together with "unification."

Here, this is the construal of the meaning: "that which rises up as one" is ekodi — the meaning being that, not being overrun by applied and sustained thought, it rises up as the foremost, the best. For in the world too, the best is called "the one." Or it may equally be said [to be called "one"] because, being devoid of applied and sustained thought, it is one without a companion. Or else, "that which causes the associated states to rise up" is udi, meaning: it makes them arise. Being "one" in the sense of "the best," and being "that which rises up" — it is ekodi; this is a designation for concentration. Thus "it develops, it increases, this ekodi" — this is the second jhāna's "unification." And since this ekodi belongs to the mind, not to a being, not to a life-principle, it is therefore called "unification of mind."

But is not this faith present in the first jhāna too, and is not this concentration called ekodi likewise present there? Why then is it only this second jhāna that is called "confidence and unification of mind"? It is answered: that first jhāna, on account of the disturbance of applied and sustained thought, is like water disturbed by waves and ripples, not thoroughly clear; therefore, even though faith is present there, it is not called "confidence." And precisely because it is not thoroughly clear there, concentration too is not properly manifest; therefore it is not called "unification" either. But in this jhāna, faith, having found its opportunity through the absence of the obstruction of applied and sustained thought, is strong; and, through gaining a companion in strong faith, concentration too becomes manifest. Therefore it should be understood that it is only this jhāna that is spoken of thus. But in the Vibhaṅga only this much is said: "confidence is whatever faith, believing, trusting, or confiding there is; unification of mind is whatever steadiness of mind ... right concentration there is." But it should be understood that this explanation does not conflict with what is said there — rather, it is entirely consonant and in agreement with it.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The water simile is doing careful work here: the claim is not that faith and concentration are absent from the first jhāna, but that they are present in a turbulent, unsettled form — like water genuinely there but stirred into waves, so that its clarity cannot be seen or named. The second jhāna does not introduce a new ingredient; it removes the disturbance (applied and sustained thought) that had been obscuring an ingredient already present, allowing it to be perceived clearly enough to deserve its own name.

The etymological unpacking of "ekodi" into two alternative derivations — "that which rises as one/best" versus "that which causes associated things to rise" — is characteristic of how this commentarial genre treats technical vocabulary: rather than settling on a single derivation, it offers both plausible readings and shows that either supports the same doctrinal point, since the text is explicit that the word functions simply as "a designation for concentration" regardless of which etymology is preferred.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
ajjhatta / niyakajjhatta

internal / the personal internal — ajjhatta (internal) narrowed here to mean specifically what is one's own, arisen in one's own mental continuity, as opposed to any broader sense of "internal" the Vibhaṅge's bare gloss might allow.

sampasādana

confidence, clarifying — from sampasādeti (to make serene, to clarify); named for the jhāna's association with faith (saddhā), on the model of a blue cloth being called "blue" through its association with the color.

ekodibhāva

unification, oneness — eka (one) + udi (rising) or seṭṭha (best); a designation for concentration itself, said here to belong to the mind, not to any being or life-principle.

vīcitaraṅga

waves and ripples — vīci (wave) + taraṅga (ripple, billow); the simile for the disturbance applied and sustained thought cause in the first jhāna's water-like mind, obscuring the clarity that becomes visible only once they are stilled.

The Second Jhāna: Without Applied Thought, Without Sustained Thought

Having explained "confidence" and "unification of mind," the chapter takes up an apparent redundancy — the formula already said applied and sustained thought are "stilled," so why does it also call the jhāna "without applied thought, without sustained thought"? — and shows that the two phrases point to different things: one names the cause, the other simply the bare absence.

Pali Source

Avitakkaṃ avicāranti bhāvanāya pahīnattā etasmiṃ, etassa vā vitakko natthīti avitakkaṃ. Imināva nayena avicāraṃ. Vibhaṅgepi vuttaṃ "iti ayañca vitakko ayañca vicāro santā honti samitā vūpasantā atthaṅgatā abbhatthaṅgatā appitā byappitā sositā visositā byantikatā, tena vuccati avitakkaṃ avicāra"nti (vibha. 576).

Etthāha "nanu ca 'vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā'ti imināpi ayamattho siddho, atha kasmā puna vuttaṃ 'avitakkaṃ avicāra'nti". Vuccate, evametaṃ siddhovāyamattho, na panetaṃ tadatthadīpakaṃ. Nanu avocumha "oḷārikassa pana oḷārikassa aṅgassa samatikkamā paṭhamajjhānato paresaṃ dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ samadhigamo hotīti dassanatthaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamāti evaṃ vutta"nti.

Apica vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ sampasādanaṃ, na kilesakālussiyassa. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā ekodibhāvaṃ, na upacārajjhānamiva nīvaraṇappahānā, paṭhamajjhānamiva ca na aṅgapātubhāvāti evaṃ sampasādanaekodibhāvānaṃ hetuparidīpakamidaṃ vacanaṃ. Tathā vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamā idaṃ avitakkaṃ avicāraṃ, na tatiyacatutthajjhānāni viya cakkhuviññāṇādīni viya ca abhāvāti evaṃ avitakkaavicārabhāvassa hetuparidīpakañca, na vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakaṃ. Vitakkavicārābhāvamattaparidīpakameva pana "avitakkaṃ avicāra"nti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Tasmā purimaṃ vatvāpi vattabbamevāti.

Ru-Yi Translation

"Without applied thought, without sustained thought": because, through development, applied thought is absent in this jhāna, or applied thought is absent to it — hence "without applied thought." In the same way, "without sustained thought." It is also said in the Vibhaṅga: "thus this applied thought and this sustained thought are calmed, stilled, quieted, gone to their end, utterly gone to their end, suppressed, thoroughly suppressed, dried up, thoroughly dried up, brought to an end — by this it is called without applied thought, without sustained thought" (Vibh. 576).

Here it may be asked: "Is not this very meaning already established by 'with the stilling of applied and sustained thought'? Why then is it said again, 'without applied thought, without sustained thought'?" It is answered: yes, this meaning is indeed already established by that; but that phrase does not make clear this present meaning. Did we not already say that "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought" was said in order to show that the attainment of the second jhāna and the rest, beyond the first jhāna, comes about through the surmounting of each one's own gross factor?

Rather, this is the point: the statement "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought, this is confidence" means confidence not arisen from the muddiness of defilement; and "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought, this is unification" means unification not as in access-concentration, through the mere abandoning of the hindrances, nor as in the first jhāna, through the mere manifestation of the jhāna factor — so this statement points out the cause of confidence and of unification. Likewise, the statement "with the stilling of applied and sustained thought, this is without applied thought, without sustained thought" means an absence not like that of the third and fourth jhānas, nor like that of eye-consciousness and the rest, where they are simply never present at all — so this points out the cause of the state of being without applied and sustained thought, not merely their bare absence. But the statement "without applied thought, without sustained thought" points out only the bare absence of applied and sustained thought. Therefore, even having said the former, the latter still needed to be said.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

This section's argument turns on a distinction the text draws with some precision: a phrase can establish that something is true (siddha) without making clear why it is true (tadatthadīpaka, "illuminating that meaning"). "With the stilling of applied and sustained thought" and "without applied thought, without sustained thought" both correctly describe the second jhāna, but the first explains the causal mechanism — stilling replacing an active disturbance — while the second states only the resulting bare fact. The comparison drawn to eye-consciousness is precise: eye-consciousness is "without applied thought" too, but trivially so, since applied thought was never a feature of that kind of consciousness to begin with, unlike the second jhāna, where applied thought was present in the state directly preceding it and has now been specifically stilled.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
siddha / atthadīpaka

established / illuminating the meaning — the technical distinction driving this whole section: a statement may already establish (siddha) a fact while a further statement is still needed to illuminate (dīpaka) the reason behind it.

hetuparidīpaka

indicating the cause — hetu (cause) + paridīpaka (illuminating); the specific function this commentary assigns to the phrase "with the stilling of," as against the merely descriptive "without."

byantikata

brought to an end, terminated — one of the string of near-synonyms the Vibhaṅga piles up (calmed, stilled, quieted, dried up, brought to an end) to describe the total cessation of applied and sustained thought in the second jhāna.

The Second Jhāna: Closing Definitions

The word-commentary on the second jhāna closes by explaining why its joy and happiness are called "born of concentration," and by working out precisely when its two abandoned factors are actually given up — not gradually, as the hindrances are at the moment of access, but all at once, only at the moment of absorption itself.

Pali Source

Samādhijanti paṭhamajjhānasamādhito sampayuttasamādhito vā jātanti attho. Tattha kiñcāpi paṭhamampi sampayuttasamādhito jātaṃ, atha kho ayameva samādhi "samādhī"ti vattabbataṃ arahati vitakkavicārakkhobhavirahena ativiya acalattā, suppasannattā ca, tasmā imassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ idameva "samādhija"nti vuttaṃ. Pītisukhanti idaṃ vuttanayameva.

Dutiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā dutiyaṃ. Idaṃ dutiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi dutiyaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ "dvaṅgavippahīnaṃ tivaṅgasamannāgata"nti, tattha vitakkavicārānaṃ pahānavasena dvaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Yathā ca paṭhamajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇāni pahīyanti, na tathā imassa vitakkavicārā. Appanākkhaṇeyeva ca panetaṃ vinā tehi uppajjati. Tenassa te "pahānaṅga"nti vuccanti. Pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ uppattivasena tivaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Tasmā yaṃ vibhaṅge "jhānanti sampasādo pīti sukhaṃ cittassa ekaggatā"ti (vibha. 580) vuttaṃ, taṃ saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetuṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Ṭhapetvā pana sampasādanaṃ nippariyāyena upanijjhānalakkhaṇappattānaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena tivaṅgikameva etaṃ hoti. Yathāha – "katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye tivaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti, pīti sukhaṃ cittassa ekaggatā"ti (dha. sa. 161; vibha. 628). Sesaṃ paṭhamajjhāne vuttanayameva.

Ru-Yi Translation

"Born of concentration": the meaning is, born from the concentration of the first jhāna, or from its associated concentration. Herein, although the first jhāna too is born from its associated concentration, nevertheless this concentration alone deserves to be called "concentration" in the eminent sense, on account of its being utterly unmoving and thoroughly clear, through the absence of the disturbance of applied and sustained thought; therefore, for the purpose of extolling it, this alone is called "born of concentration." "Joy and happiness" is as already stated.

"Second": second by numerical order; or it is "second" also in the sense that this is the second attainment entered upon. Now, as to what was said — "having abandoned two factors, possessed of three factors" — herein, the state of having abandoned two factors should be understood by way of the abandoning of applied and sustained thought. And unlike the first jhāna, where the hindrances are abandoned already at the moment of access, applied and sustained thought are not abandoned in that way for this jhāna; rather, this jhāna arises without them only at the moment of absorption itself. For this reason they are called its "abandoned factors." As for joy, happiness, and unification of mind — the state of being possessed of three factors should be understood by way of the arising of these three. Therefore, as to what is said in the Vibhaṅga, "jhāna is confidence, joy, happiness, unification of mind" (Vibh. 580), that was said in a manner of speaking, in order to show the jhāna together with its accessories. But apart from confidence, by way of the factors that have, strictly speaking, reached the characteristic of close contemplation, this jhāna has only three factors. As it is said: "what, on that occasion, is the threefold jhāna? Joy, happiness, unification of mind" (Dhs. 161; Vibh. 628). The rest is as already stated for the first jhāna.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The distinction drawn here between how the hindrances are abandoned and how applied and sustained thought are abandoned is a fine but important point of Abhidhamma-style analysis: the five hindrances are already absent by the time access-concentration (upacāra) is reached, well before absorption proper — but applied and sustained thought remain present right up through access-concentration on the second jhāna's own threshold, and are given up only in the single moment absorption itself occurs. This is why the text insists on calling them "abandoned factors" in a technical sense distinct from how the hindrances are abandoned for the first jhāna: not a preparatory clearing-away, but a factor present until the very last possible moment before vanishing at the instant of attainment.

The closing remark that "confidence" is set aside when the jhāna's factors are counted strictly (leaving only three: joy, happiness, unification of mind) rather than four (with confidence) shows the same careful terminological discipline as chapter one's distinction between the first jhāna's "five factors" for descriptive purposes and its stricter core count — the treatise consistently distinguishes a fuller, more pedagogically complete list of qualities present in a state from the narrower list of qualities that meet the technical definition of a "jhāna factor" (upanijjhāna-lakkhaṇa, having reached the characteristic of close contemplation).

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
gaṇanānupubbatā

by numerical order — gaṇanā (counting) + anupubbatā (successiveness); one of the two senses in which the second jhāna is called "second," the other being that it is the second attainment entered upon in sequence.

pahānaṅga

an abandoned factor — pahāna (abandoning) + aṅga (factor); the technical term for a jhāna factor of the preceding state that is given up in reaching the present one, here applied specifically to applied and sustained thought.

upanijjhānalakkhaṇa

having reached the characteristic of close contemplation — upa (close) + nijjhāna (contemplation) + lakkhaṇa (characteristic); the strict criterion by which a quality qualifies as a true jhāna factor, used here to explain why confidence, though present, is not counted among the second jhāna's three factors.

pariyāyena / nippariyāyena

in a manner of speaking / in the strict sense — a standard commentarial pair distinguishing a loose, pedagogically inclusive way of speaking (pariyāya) from the technically precise one (nippariyāya), applied here to the Vibhaṅga's four-factor description versus the stricter three-factor count.

The Third Jhāna: Attainment and Formula

The chapter now takes up the third jhāna, reached by the same procedure as before — but this time the factor judged too gross is joy itself, identified through a direct citation of the Dīgha Nikāya's account of what makes joy "gross" in comparison to what remains.

Pali Source

Evamadhigate pana tasmimpi vuttanayeneva pañcahākārehi ciṇṇavasinā hutvā paguṇadutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya "ayaṃ samāpatti āsannavitakkavicārapaccatthikā, 'yadeva tattha pītigataṃ cetaso uppilāvitaṃ, etenetaṃ oḷārikaṃ akkhāyatī'ti (dī. ni. 1.96) vuttāya pītiyā oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā"ti ca tattha dosaṃ disvā tatiyajjhānaṃ santato manasikaritvā dutiyajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya tatiyādhigamāya yogo kātabbo. Athassa yadā dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya satassa sampajānassa jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhato pīti oḷārikato upaṭṭhāti, sukhañceva ekaggatā ca santato upaṭṭhāti. Tadāssa oḷārikaṅgappahānāya santaaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ "pathavī pathavī"ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto "idāni tatiyajjhānaṃ uppajjissatī"ti bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā tadeva pathavīkasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tato tasmiṃyevārammaṇe cattāri pañca vā javanāni javanti, yesaṃ avasāne ekaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ tatiyajjhānikaṃ, sesāni vuttanayeneva kāmāvacarānīti. Ettāvatā ca panesa pītiyā ca virāgā upekkhako ca viharati sato ca sampajāno, sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti, tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti (dī. ni. 1.230; dha. sa. 163). Evamanena ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Having thus attained the second jhāna, in that too, by the method already stated, having become one who has practiced the five kinds of mastery, and emerging from the second jhāna made familiar, and having seen the danger there — "this attainment has applied and sustained thought as its near enemies, and its factors are weak owing to the grossness of the joy called, in the passage 'that mental exhilaration which is joy therein — by this it is declared to be gross' (D.N. 1.96), gross" — and having brought to mind the third jhāna as peaceful, effort should be made for the attainment of the third by exhausting the relish for the second jhāna. Then, when — emerging from the second jhāna, mindful and fully aware, reviewing the jhāna factors — joy appears to him as gross, while happiness and unification appear as peaceful, then, for the abandoning of the gross factor and the acquiring of the peaceful factor, as he brings that very sign repeatedly to mind, thinking "earth, earth," thinking "now the third jhāna will arise," the life-continuum is interrupted and a mind-door adverting-consciousness arises taking that very earth kasiṇa as its object. Then, in that same object, four or five impulsion-consciousnesses run their course, at the end of which one belongs to the fine-material sphere, of the third jhāna; the rest are of the sense sphere, in the way already stated. By this much, he dwells with the fading of joy, equanimous, mindful, and fully aware, and experiences happiness with the body — that of which the noble ones declare, "equanimous, mindful, one who dwells happily" — he enters upon and dwells in the third jhāna (D.N. 1.230; Dhs. 163). Thus is attained by him the third jhāna on the earth kasiṇa, which has abandoned one factor, is possessed of two factors, is good in three ways, and endowed with the ten characteristics.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

Notably, this section names the specific canonical source for calling joy "gross" — the Dīgha Nikāya's own definition of what joy's mental exhilaration (uppilāvita) consists in — rather than simply asserting the judgment. Grounding a technical claim in an exact citation, retrievable by chapter and verse, rather than in the commentator's own authority, is one of this genre's most consistent habits, visible throughout this whole chapter's treatment of the jhānas.

The factor arithmetic continues its contraction: the second jhāna had "abandoned two, possessed of three"; the third has "abandoned one, possessed of two" — dropping joy while retaining happiness and unification of mind. The formula itself, quoted directly from the canon, now names a wholly new element not present in the first two jhānas' formulas: equanimity (upekkhā), which the chapter's next section will show is not a single simple quality but one requiring careful disambiguation from nine other things also called by the same name.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
uppilāvita

mental exhilaration, buoyancy — from uppilavati (to be excited, to bob up); the specific quality of joy the Dīgha Nikāya names as what makes it "gross" relative to the third jhāna's quieter happiness.

ekaṅgavippahīna / duvaṅgasamannāgata

having abandoned one factor / possessed of two factors — the third jhāna's factor-formula: joy is dropped, leaving happiness and unification of mind (with equanimity present but, as the next section will explain, not counted among the strict factor total).

upekkhaka

equanimous, possessing equanimity — the adjectival form introduced for the first time in the jhāna formulas at the third jhāna, the subject of the chapter's next, extensive section on the ten kinds of equanimity.

"With the Fading of Joy"

The chapter's word-commentary on the third jhāna opens with the phrase "with the fading of joy," showing that the little word "and" (ca) linking it to what follows can be construed two different ways — either compounding it with "stilling" or with "the stilling of applied and sustained thought" — and that the formula's real purpose, either way, is not to announce something newly abandoned but to praise the jhāna by echoing how the third noble path is praised even for defilements it does not itself first abandon.

Pali Source

Tattha pītiyā ca virāgāti virāgo nāma vuttappakārāya pītiyā jigucchanaṃ vā samatikkamo vā. Ubhinnaṃ pana antarā casaddo sampiṇḍanattho, so vūpasamaṃ vā sampiṇḍeti vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamaṃ vā. Tattha yadā vūpasamameva sampiṇḍeti, tadā "pītiyā ca virāgā kiñca bhiyyo vūpasamā cā"ti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo jigucchanattho hoti, tasmā "pītiyā jigucchanā ca vūpasamā cā"ti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo. Yadā pana vitakkavicāravūpasamaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tadā "pītiyā ca virāgā, kiñca bhiyyo vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā"ti evaṃ yojanā veditabbā. Imissā ca yojanāya virāgo samatikkamanattho hoti, tasmā "pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā"ti ayamattho daṭṭhabbo.

Kāmañcete vitakkavicārā dutiyajjhāneyeva vūpasantā, imassa pana jhānassa maggaparidīpanatthaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthañcetaṃ vuttaṃ. Vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamāti hi vutte idaṃ paññāyati, nūna vitakkavicāravūpasamo maggo imassa jhānassāti. Yathā ca tatiye ariyamagge appahīnānampi sakkāyadiṭṭhādīnaṃ "pañcannaṃ orambhāgiyānaṃ saṃyojanānaṃ pahānā"ti (dī. ni. 1.373; ma. ni. 2.133; saṃ. ni. 5.184; a. ni. 3.88) evaṃ pahānaṃ vuccamānaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti, tadadhigamāya ussukkānaṃ ussāhajanakaṃ, evameva idha avūpasantānampi vitakkavicārānaṃ vūpasamo vuccamāno vaṇṇabhaṇanaṃ hoti. Tenāyamattho vutto "pītiyā ca samatikkamā vitakkavicārānañca vūpasamā"ti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "with the fading of joy": fading (virāga) here means either the disgust for, or the surmounting of, joy of the kind already described. But the word "and," standing between the two, has a connective sense, and it connects either with "stilling" or with "the stilling of applied and sustained thought." Herein, when it connects with "stilling" alone, then the construction should be understood thus: "with the fading of joy, and, further still, with its stilling." And in this construction, "fading" has the sense of disgust; therefore the meaning to be seen is "with the disgust for joy, and with its stilling." But when it connects with "the stilling of applied and sustained thought," then the construction should be understood thus: "with the fading of joy, and, further still, with the stilling of applied and sustained thought." And in this construction, "fading" has the sense of surmounting; therefore the meaning to be seen is "with the surmounting of joy, and with the stilling of applied and sustained thought."

Although it is true that applied and sustained thought are already stilled in the second jhāna itself, nevertheless this was said for the purpose of showing the path to this jhāna, and for the purpose of praising it. For when it is said "and with the stilling of applied and sustained thought," this becomes known: surely the stilling of applied and sustained thought is the path to this jhāna. And just as, in regard to the third noble path, even though views of self-identity and the rest are not there first abandoned, still, when it is said, in the manner of "through the abandoning of the five lower fetters" (D.N. 1.373; M.N. 2.133; S.N. 5.184; A.N. 3.88), such an abandoning is spoken of as praise, generating enthusiasm in those striving to attain it — just so here, though applied and sustained thought are not [newly] stilled, their stilling, when spoken of, becomes praise. For this reason this meaning was stated: "with the surmounting of joy, and with the stilling of applied and sustained thought."

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The grammatical ambiguity resolved here — whether "and" links "fading" with "stilling" (both applying to joy) or with "the stilling of applied and sustained thought" (a separate clause carried over from the second jhāna's own factors) — is a genuinely fine point of Pāli syntax, and the commentary's method is to work out both readings fully rather than simply picking one, since each yields a coherent and defensible sense.

The comparison to how the third noble path is described is a striking piece of internal cross-referencing: just as the canonical formula for the third path credits it with "abandoning the five lower fetters" even though several of those fetters (such as self-identity view) were already abandoned at the first path, and the phrase functions as praise and encouragement rather than a literal claim of what is newly cut off there — so too the third jhāna's formula credits it with "the stilling of applied and sustained thought" as praise, even though that stilling in fact already occurred one jhāna earlier. The text uses one already-familiar doctrinal pattern to illuminate a fresh grammatical puzzle in a different part of the system entirely.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
virāga

fading, dispassion — here glossed with two distinct senses, jigucchana (disgust, revulsion) and samatikkama (surmounting, going beyond), each yielding a different construal of the third jhāna's opening formula.

sampiṇḍanattha

having a connective sense — sampiṇḍana (joining together) + attha (meaning); the grammatical function assigned here to the particle "ca" ("and"), which can bind the phrase "fading of joy" to either of two different following clauses.

orambhāgiyasaṃyojana

the lower fetters — orambhāgiya (belonging to the lower part [of existence]) + saṃyojana (fetter); the five fetters credited to the third noble path's "abandoning," cited here as the parallel case of praise-through-restatement.

vaṇṇabhaṇana

speaking in praise — vaṇṇa (praise, quality) + bhaṇana (speaking); the function this section assigns to restating an already-accomplished stilling, generating enthusiasm in those still striving toward the attainment.

Equanimity, and Its Ten Kinds

The formula's word "equanimous" now receives the chapter's most extensive single word-commentary: the text lists ten distinct things all called "equanimity" (upekkhā) in different canonical contexts, defines each in turn by its own canonical citation, shows that six of the ten are in fact one and the same quality viewed under different circumstances, shows that two more are likewise one quality doing two different jobs, and finally identifies which single one of the ten is meant here — and why equanimity, though technically present from the very first jhāna onward, only becomes prominent enough to be named starting at the third.

Pali Source

Upekkhako ca viharatīti ettha upapattito ikkhatīti upekkhā. Samaṃ passati, apakkhapatitā hutvā passatīti attho. Tāya visadāya vipulāya thāmagatāya samannāgatattā tatiyajjhānasamaṅgī upekkhakoti vuccati.

Upekkhā pana dasavidhā hoti chaḷaṅgupekkhā, brahmavihārupekkhā, bojjhaṅgupekkhā, vīriyupekkhā, saṅkhārupekkhā, vedanupekkhā, vipassanupekkhā, tatramajjhattupekkhā, jhānupekkhā, pārisuddhupekkhāti.

Tattha yā "idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā neva sumano hoti, na dummano, upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajāno"ti (a. ni. 6.1) evamāgatā khīṇāsavassa chasu dvāresu iṭṭhāniṭṭhachaḷārammaṇāpāthe parisuddhapakatibhāvāvijahanākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ chaḷaṅgupekkhā nāma.

Yā pana "upekkhāsahagatena cetasā ekaṃ disaṃ pharitvā viharatī"ti (dī. ni. 1.556; ma. ni. 1.77) evamāgatā sattesu majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ brahmavihārupekkhā nāma.

Yā "upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṃ bhāveti vivekanissita"nti (ma. ni. 1.27) evamāgatā sahajātadhammānaṃ majjhattākārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ bojjhaṅgupekkhā nāma.

Yā pana "kālenakālaṃ upekkhānimittaṃ manasikarotī"ti (a. ni. 3.103) evamāgatā anaccāraddhanātisithilavīriyasaṅkhātā upekkhā, ayaṃ vīriyupekkhā nāma.

Yā "kati saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti, kati saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjanti. Aṭṭha saṅkhārupekkhā samathavasena uppajjanti. Dasa saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanāvasena uppajjantī"ti (paṭi. ma. 1.57) evamāgatā nīvaraṇādipaṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā gahaṇe majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma.

Yā pana "yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti upekkhāsahagata"nti (dha. sa. 150) evamāgatā adukkhamasukhasaññitā upekkhā, ayaṃ vedanupekkhā nāma.

Yā "yadatthi yaṃ bhūtaṃ, taṃ pajahati, upekkhaṃ paṭilabhatī"ti (ma. ni. 3.71; a. ni. 7.55) evamāgatā vicinane majjhattabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma.

Yā pana chandādīsu yevāpanakesu āgatā sahajātānaṃ samavāhitabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhā nāma.

Yā "upekkhako ca viharatī"ti (dī. ni. 1.230; dha. sa. 163) evamāgatā aggasukhepi tasmiṃ apakkhapātajananī upekkhā, ayaṃ jhānupekkhā nāma.

Yā pana "upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhāna"nti (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165) evamāgatā sabbapaccanīkaparisuddhā paccanīkavūpasamanepi abyāpārabhūtā upekkhā, ayaṃ pārisuddhupekkhā nāma.

Tatra chaḷaṅgupekkhā ca brahmavihārupekkhā ca bojjhaṅgupekkhā ca tatramajjhattupekkhā ca jhānupekkhā ca pārisuddhupekkhā ca atthato ekā, tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti. Tena tena avatthābhedena panassā ayaṃ bhedo. Ekassāpi sato sattassa kumārayuvatherasenāpatirājādivasena bhedo viya. Tasmā tāsu yattha chaḷaṅgupekkhā, na tattha bojjhaṅgupekkhādayo. Yattha vā pana bojjhaṅgupekkhā, na tattha chaḷaṅgupekkhādayo hontīti veditabbā.

Yathā cetāsamatthato ekībhāvo, evaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā vipassanupekkhānampi. Paññā eva hi sā kiccavasena dvidhā bhinnā. Yathā hi purisassa sāyaṃ gehaṃ paviṭṭhaṃ sappaṃ ajapadadaṇḍaṃ gahetvā pariyesamānassa taṃ thusakoṭṭhake nipannaṃ disvā "sappo nu kho, no"ti avalokentassa sovattikattayaṃ disvā nibbematikassa "sappo, na sappo"ti vicinane majjhattatā hoti, evameva yā āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāñāṇena lakkhaṇattaye diṭṭhe saṅkhārānaṃ aniccabhāvādivicinane majjhattatā uppajjati, ayaṃ vipassanupekkhā nāma. Yathā pana tassa purisassa ajapadadaṇḍena gāḷhaṃ sappaṃ gahetvā "kiṃ tāhaṃ imaṃ sappaṃ aviheṭhento attānañca iminā aḍaṃsāpento muñceyya"nti muñcanākārameva pariyesato gahaṇe majjhattatā hoti. Evameva yā lakkhaṇattayassa diṭṭhattā āditte viya tayo bhave passato saṅkhāraggahaṇe majjhattatā, ayaṃ saṅkhārupekkhā nāma. Iti vipassanupekkhāya siddhāya saṅkhārupekkhāpi siddhāva hoti. Iminā panesā vicinanaggahaṇesu majjhattasaṅkhātena kiccena dvidhā bhinnāti. Vīriyupekkhā pana vedanupekkhā ca aññamaññañca avasesāhi ca atthato bhinnā evāti.

Iti imāsu upekkhāsu jhānupekkhā idhādhippetā. Sā majjhattalakkhaṇā, anābhogarasā, abyāpārapaccupaṭṭhānā, pītivirāgapadaṭṭhānāti. Etthāha, nanu cāyamatthato tatramajjhattupekkhāva hoti, sā ca paṭhamadutiyajjhānesupi atthi. Tasmā tatrāpi upekkhako ca viharatīti evamayaṃ vattabbā siyā, sā kasmā na vuttāti. Aparibyattakiccato. Aparibyattañhi tassā tattha kiccaṃ vitakkādīhi abhibhūtattā. Idha panāyaṃ vitakkavicārapītīhi anabhibhūtattā ukkhittasirā viya hutvā paribyattakiccā jātā, tasmā vuttāti.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "equanimous, he dwells": equanimity (upekkhā) is so called because it looks on (ikkhati) impartially (upa). The meaning is: it sees evenly, seeing without taking sides. Because he is endowed with that equanimity, now grown clear, abundant, and firmly established, one possessed of the third jhāna is called "equanimous."

Now, equanimity is tenfold: equanimity of the sixfold basis, equanimity of the divine abidings, equanimity as an enlightenment factor, equanimity of energy, equanimity regarding formations, equanimity as a feeling, equanimity of insight, equanimity of neutrality of mind, equanimity of jhāna, and equanimity of purity.

Herein, that equanimity which comes down in the passage, "here, monks, a monk, having seen a form with the eye, is neither pleased nor displeased, but dwells equanimous, mindful, and fully aware" (A.N. 6.1) — the state, occurring at all six doors of one whose defilements are destroyed, of not abandoning one's purified, natural condition when desirable, undesirable, or neutral objects of the six kinds come into range — this is called equanimity of the sixfold basis.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "he dwells pervading one direction with a mind imbued with equanimity" (D.N. 1.556; M.N. 1.77) — the state of neutrality toward beings — this is called equanimity of the divine abidings.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "he develops the equanimity enlightenment factor, dependent on seclusion" (M.N. 1.27) — the state of neutrality toward states arisen together with it — this is called equanimity as an enlightenment factor.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "from time to time he attends to the sign of equanimity" (A.N. 3.103) — reckoned as energy neither overly strained nor overly slack — this is called equanimity of energy.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "how many equanimities regarding formations arise by way of serenity, how many equanimities regarding formations arise by way of insight? Eight equanimities regarding formations arise by way of serenity; ten equanimities regarding formations arise by way of insight" (Paṭis. 1.57) — the state of neutrality in the grasping of things reflected upon, such as the hindrances and the rest, once they have subsided — this is called equanimity regarding formations.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "on the occasion when a wholesome consciousness of the sense sphere has arisen accompanied by equanimity" (Dhs. 150) — perceived as neither-painful-nor-pleasant — this is called equanimity as a feeling.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "whatever there is, whatever has come to be, that he abandons, and thereby he acquires equanimity" (M.N. 3.71; A.N. 7.55) — the state of neutrality in investigation — this is called equanimity of insight.

That equanimity which comes down among the "or-whatever-states" [in the enumeration of mental factors] together with zeal and the rest — the state of even balance among states arisen together with it — this is called equanimity of neutrality of mind.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "he dwells equanimous" (D.N. 1.230; Dhs. 163) — the state, even amid supreme happiness, of not producing partiality toward it — this is called equanimity of jhāna.

That equanimity which comes down in the passage, "the fourth jhāna, which has purity of mindfulness through equanimity" (D.N. 1.232; Dhs. 165) — purified with respect to all opposing states, and the state of non-involvement even in the stilling of what opposes it — this is called equanimity of purity.

Herein, equanimity of the sixfold basis, equanimity of the divine abidings, equanimity as an enlightenment factor, equanimity of neutrality of mind, equanimity of jhāna, and equanimity of purity are, in point of meaning, one — namely, equanimity of neutrality of mind alone. But this difference among them exists by way of their differing circumstances, just as the difference [in name] for a single being who is at one time called a child, at another a young man, at another an elder, a general, or a king. Therefore, among these, wherever there is equanimity of the sixfold basis, there is not equanimity as an enlightenment factor and the rest; and wherever there is equanimity as an enlightenment factor, there is not equanimity of the sixfold basis and the rest — this should be understood.

And just as these are, in point of essential nature, a unity, so too are equanimity regarding formations and equanimity of insight. For that very same understanding is divided in two by way of function. For just as, when a man in the evening has entered his house and is searching, taking up a stick shaped like a goat's foot, for a snake that has gone in, and, seeing it lying in the husk-chamber, being in doubt as to whether it is a snake or not, examines it, and then, on seeing the three markings [of a snake], is free of doubt and has neutrality in the investigation "it is a snake, it is not [merely a rope]" — just so, the neutrality that arises in one who has begun insight, when the three characteristics have been seen by insight-knowledge, in investigating the impermanence and so on of formations — this is called equanimity of insight. And just as, for that same man, having firmly seized the snake with the goat's-foot stick, there is neutrality in the grasping, as he seeks only the manner of releasing it, thinking "how might I release this snake without harming it and without letting it bite me" — just so, the neutrality in grasping formations, of one who, the three characteristics having been seen, views the three realms of existence as though ablaze — this is called equanimity regarding formations. Thus, when equanimity of insight is accomplished, equanimity regarding formations is accomplished too. By this it is divided in two by the function reckoned as neutrality in investigating and in grasping. But equanimity of energy and equanimity as a feeling are, in point of meaning, distinct from one another and from the rest.

Thus, among these equanimities, it is equanimity of jhāna that is intended here. It has the characteristic of neutrality, the function of non-application, the manifestation of non-involvement, and its proximate cause is the fading of joy. Here it may be asked: is not this, in point of meaning, simply equanimity of neutrality of mind, and is not that present already in the first and second jhānas too? Should it not, then, be said even there, "he dwells equanimous"? Why is it not said? Because its function is not manifest there. For its function is unmanifest there on account of being overwhelmed by applied thought and the rest. But here, being unoverwhelmed by applied thought, sustained thought, and joy, it is born with its function manifest, as though with head held high; therefore it is said here.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The reduction of ten named "equanimities" down to three genuinely distinct underlying realities — six names for one thing (neutrality of mind, appearing under different circumstances), two names for a second thing (understanding itself, doing two different jobs), and two further things each unique to itself — is a clean demonstration of this commentarial method's central move: canonical vocabulary is gathered exhaustively from across the four Nikāyas, the Abhidhamma, and the Paṭisambhidāmagga, sorted by function rather than by superficial verbal similarity, and only then collapsed to its true underlying count. The simile used for the six-in-one case — a single person called child, youth, elder, general, or king depending entirely on circumstance rather than on any change in the person themselves — makes vivid that a difference in name need not indicate any difference in the thing named.

The snake-and-goat's-foot-stick simile distinguishing equanimity of insight from equanimity regarding formations is doing very precise work: the same understanding (paññā) first performs the cautious, still-uncertain act of investigation (is this really a snake, or not?) and only afterward, once certain, performs the entirely different act of grasping the confirmed danger in order to safely release it. The two are sequential functions of one faculty, not two faculties — exactly the same relationship the text has just established for the six equanimities that reduce to neutrality of mind.

The closing explanation of why "equanimous" is named only from the third jhāna onward, though the underlying quality of neutrality of mind is technically present from the first, mirrors precisely the second jhāna's earlier explanation for why "confidence" and "unification of mind" were not named until faith and concentration had a chance to become manifest, freed from the disturbance of grosser factors. The recurring principle across this whole chapter is that a quality's presence and a quality's canonical naming are two different things — naming waits until the quality's function becomes prominent enough to be functionally distinguishable, "as though with head held high."

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
tatramajjhattupekkhā

equanimity of neutrality of mind — tatra (there) + majjhatta (situated in the middle) + upekkhā; identified here as the single underlying reality behind six of the ten named equanimities, differing only by the circumstance in which it occurs.

saṅkhārupekkhā / vipassanupekkhā

equanimity regarding formations / equanimity of insight — the two functional divisions of a single understanding (paññā): investigating formations under the three characteristics (insight), and then grasping them with neutrality in order to let them go (formations).

jhānupekkhā

equanimity of jhāna — the specific equanimity meant in the third jhāna's formula, defined here by its own four-part definition (characteristic/function/manifestation/proximate cause): neutrality, non-application, non-involvement, and the fading of joy as its cause.

aparibyattakicca / paribyattakicca

unmanifest function / manifest function — aparibyatta (indistinct) vs. paribyatta (distinct, clear) + kicca (function); the distinction explaining why equanimity is present but unnamed in the first two jhānas, and named only once applied thought, sustained thought, and joy no longer overwhelm it.

Mindful and Fully Aware, and the Third Jhāna's Happiness

The word-commentary closes out the third jhāna by defining "mindful" and "fully aware" through their own characteristic-function-manifestation formulas, explaining why these qualities — though present in the earlier jhānas too — are named explicitly only here (using the image of a milk-calf drawn back toward its mother, and of beings' vulnerability to intoxication by extreme pleasure), showing in what sense the third jhāna's happiness is experienced "with the body," and closing with why the noble ones praise this jhāna specifically, before working out its factor-count and numbering.

Pali Source

Idāni sato ca sampajānoti ettha saratīti sato. Sampajānātīti sampajāno. Puggalena sati ca sampajaññañca vuttaṃ. Tattha saraṇalakkhaṇā sati, asammussanarasā, ārakkhapaccupaṭṭhānā. Asammohalakkhaṇaṃ sampajaññaṃ, tīraṇarasaṃ, pavicayapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ.

Tattha kiñcāpi idaṃ satisampajaññaṃ purimajjhānesupi atthi. Muṭṭhasatissa hi asampajānassa upacāramattampi na sampajjati, pageva appanā. Oḷārikattā pana tesaṃ jhānānaṃ bhūmiyaṃ viya purisassa cittassa gati sukhā hoti, abyattaṃ tattha satisampajaññakiccaṃ. Oḷārikaṅgappahānena pana sukhumattā imassa jhānassa purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ viya satisampajaññakiccapariggahitā eva cittassa gati icchitabbāti idheva vuttaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo, yathā dhenupago vaccho dhenuto apanīto arakkhiyamāno punadeva dhenuṃ upagacchati, evamidaṃ tatiyajjhānasukhaṃ pītito apanītaṃ, taṃ satisampajaññārakkhena arakkhiyamānaṃ punadeva pītiṃ upagaccheyya, pītisampayuttameva siyā. Sukhe vāpi sattā sārajjanti, idañca atimadhuraṃ sukhaṃ, tato paraṃ sukhābhāvā. Satisampajaññānubhāvena panettha sukhe asārajjanā hoti, no aññathāti imampi atthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ idamidheva vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Idāni sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti ettha kiñcāpi tatiyajjhānasamaṅgino sukhapaṭisaṃvedanābhogo natthi. Evaṃ santepi yasmā tassa nāmakāyena sampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ. Yaṃ vā taṃ nāmakāyasampayuttaṃ sukhaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānenassa yasmā atipaṇītena rūpena rūpakāyo phuṭo, yassa phuṭattā jhānā vuṭṭhitopi sukhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeyya. Tasmā etamatthaṃ dassento sukhañca kāyena paṭisaṃvedetīti āha.

Idāni yaṃ taṃ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti ettha yaṃjhānahetu yaṃjhānakāraṇā taṃ tatiyajjhānasamaṅgipuggalaṃ buddhādayo ariyā ācikkhanti desenti paññapenti paṭṭhapenti vivaranti vibhajanti uttānīkaronti pakāsenti, pasaṃsantīti adhippāyo. Kinti? Upekkhako satimā sukhavihārīti. Taṃ tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharatīti evamettha yojanā veditabbā.

Kasmā pana taṃ te evaṃ pasaṃsantīti? Pasaṃsārahato. Ayañhi yasmā atimadhurasukhe sukhapāramippattepi tatiyajjhāne upekkhako, na tattha sukhābhisaṅgena ākaḍḍhiyati. Yathā ca pīti na uppajjati, evaṃ upaṭṭhitasatitāya satimā. Yasmā ca ariyakantaṃ ariyajanasevitameva ca asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ sukhaṃ nāmakāyena paṭisaṃvedeti, tasmā pasaṃsāraho hoti. Iti pasaṃsārahato naṃ ariyā te evaṃ pasaṃsāhetubhūte guṇe pakāsento "upekkhako satimā sukhavihārī"ti evaṃ pasaṃsantīti veditabbaṃ.

Tatiyanti gaṇanānupubbatā tatiyaṃ, idaṃ tatiyaṃ samāpajjatītipi tatiyaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ "ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgata"nti, ettha pītiyā pahānavasena ekaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Sā panesā dutiyajjhānassa vitakkavicārā viya appanākkhaṇeyeva pahīyati. Tena nassa sā pahānaṅganti vuccati. Sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pana dvinnaṃ uppattivasena duvaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Tasmā yaṃ vibhaṅge "jhānanti upekkhā sati sampajaññaṃ sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā"ti (vibha. 591) vuttaṃ, taṃ saparikkhāraṃ jhānaṃ dassetuṃ pariyāyena vuttaṃ. Ṭhapetvā pana upekkhāsatisampajaññāni nippariyāyena upanijjhānalakkhaṇappattānaṃ aṅgānaṃ vasena duvaṅgikamevetaṃ hoti. Yathāha – "katamaṃ tasmiṃ samaye duvaṅgikaṃ jhānaṃ hoti, sukhaṃ cittassekaggatā"ti (dha. sa. 163; vibha. 624). Sesaṃ paṭhamajjhāne vuttanayameva.

Ru-Yi Translation

Now, herein, "mindful and fully aware": one who remembers (sarati) is mindful (sato); one who is fully aware (sampajānāti) is fully aware (sampajāno). By this person, mindfulness and full awareness are meant. Herein, mindfulness has the characteristic of remembering, the function of not confusing, and the manifestation of guarding. Full awareness has the characteristic of non-confusion, the function of investigating, and the manifestation of scrutiny.

Herein, although this mindfulness and full awareness are present in the earlier jhānas too — for one of confused mindfulness, lacking full awareness, does not even accomplish access, let alone absorption — nevertheless, because of the grossness of those jhānas, the mind's course there is as easy as a man's course on level ground; there, the function of mindfulness and full awareness is not distinct. But in this jhāna, because it is subtle through the abandoning of the gross factor, the mind's course should be desired to be one grasped by the function of mindfulness and full awareness alone, as if on a razor's edge — this is why it is stated only here. What is more: just as a milk-calf, removed from its mother and left unguarded, would return again to its mother, so too this third jhāna's happiness, removed from joy, if left unguarded by the guard of mindfulness and full awareness, might return again to joy, and become conjoined with joy once more. Moreover, beings become intoxicated with happiness, and this is an extremely sweet happiness, beyond which there is no [greater] happiness. But through the power of mindfulness and full awareness, there is here no intoxication with happiness, and not otherwise — it is to show this particular point of meaning too that this was stated only here.

Now, herein, "and experiences happiness with the body": although one possessed of the third jhāna has no engagement in experiencing happiness [directly, through jhāna-consciousness itself], nevertheless, since happiness is associated with his mental body, or since — that happiness being associated with the mental body — his material body, through the origination caused by that happiness, is touched by exceedingly refined matter, and since, that body being touched, he would experience happiness even upon emerging from the jhāna, therefore, showing this meaning, it was said, "and experiences happiness with the body."

Now, herein, "that of which the noble ones declare: equanimous, mindful, one who dwells happily": the intent is that the Buddha and the other noble ones declare, teach, make known, establish, disclose, analyze, elucidate, and proclaim — that is, praise — that person possessed of the third jhāna, by reason of that jhāna, on account of that jhāna. Saying what? "Equanimous, mindful, one who dwells happily." The construction here should be understood thus: he enters upon and dwells in that third jhāna.

But why do they praise him thus? Because he is worthy of praise. For, though the third jhāna has reached the very culmination of happiness, in an extremely sweet happiness, he is equanimous there, not drawn along by attachment to that happiness. And just as joy does not arise, so, through his established mindfulness, is he mindful. And since he experiences with his mental body an unsullied happiness, dear to the noble ones and resorted to by noble persons, he is therefore worthy of praise. Thus, it should be understood that the noble ones, proclaiming these praiseworthy qualities that are the very grounds for such praise, praise him thus: "equanimous, mindful, one who dwells happily."

"Third": third by numerical order; or it is "third" also in the sense that this is the third attainment entered upon. Now, as to what was said, "having abandoned one factor, possessed of two factors" — herein, the state of having abandoned one factor should be understood by way of the abandoning of joy. And that joy, like the applied and sustained thought of the second jhāna, is abandoned only at the moment of absorption itself. For this reason it is called its "abandoned factor." As for happiness and unification of mind — the state of being possessed of two factors should be understood by way of the arising of these two. Therefore, as to what is said in the Vibhaṅga, "jhāna is equanimity, mindfulness, full awareness, happiness, unification of mind" (Vibh. 591), that was said in a manner of speaking, in order to show the jhāna together with its accessories. But apart from equanimity, mindfulness, and full awareness, by way of the factors that have, strictly speaking, reached the characteristic of close contemplation, this jhāna has only two factors. As it is said: "what, on that occasion, is the twofold jhāna? Happiness, unification of mind" (Dhs. 163; Vibh. 624). The rest is as already stated for the first jhāna.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The milk-calf simile makes a precise psychological claim: happiness separated from joy is not automatically stable on its own — left unattended, it has a natural tendency to drift back toward the more excited state it was refined out of, exactly as a calf, if not actively kept apart, will wander back to its mother. Mindfulness and full awareness are what actively hold the separation in place, not merely accompanying qualities but the very mechanism preventing regression. The razor's-edge image for the mind's course in this jhāna makes the same point from the opposite direction: at this level of subtlety, unguarded attention has no margin for error at all.

The explanation of "experiences happiness with the body" is a careful piece of Abhidhamma physiology: the claim is not that the meditator, absorbed in the third jhāna itself, is consciously registering bodily happiness at that very moment — jhāna-consciousness has no such engagement — but that the exceptionally refined matter produced by the mental happiness pervades the physical body, so that happiness becomes available to be experienced even once the meditator has emerged from the absorption. This distinction between what is technically present during absorption and what becomes accessible upon emerging recurs throughout the chapter's careful accounting of exactly which factors are active at which precise moment.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
sati / sampajañña

mindfulness / full awareness — defined here by their own characteristic-function-manifestation formulas: sati (remembering, not confusing, guarding) and sampajañña (non-confusion, investigating, scrutiny), named explicitly only from the third jhāna, where their guarding function becomes indispensable.

dhenupagavaccha

a milk-calf, one that still goes to its mother — dhenu (milk-cow) + upaga (going to) + vaccha (calf); the simile for happiness's tendency to drift back toward joy if not actively guarded by mindfulness and full awareness.

nāmakāya / rūpakāya

the mental body / the material body — nāma (name, mentality) + kāya (body, group) versus rūpa (form, matter) + kāya; the distinction underlying the explanation of how happiness, though a mental factor, comes to be "experienced with the body" through the refined matter it generates.

pasaṃsāraha

worthy of praise — pasaṃsā (praise) + araha (worthy, deserving); the quality explicitly attributed to one possessed of the third jhāna, grounding the noble ones' own praise of him as "equanimous, mindful, one who dwells happily."

The Fourth Jhāna: Attainment and Formula

The chapter turns to the fourth and, in the fourfold scheme, final jhāna, reached by the same disciplined procedure as before — this time the factor judged too gross is the third jhāna's happiness itself, again identified through direct citation of the Dīgha Nikāya's own definition of what makes that happiness "gross."

Pali Source

Evamadhigate pana tasmiṃpi vuttanayeneva pañcahākārehi ciṇṇavasinā hutvā paguṇatatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya "ayaṃ samāpatti āsannapītipaccatthikā, 'yadeva tattha sukhamiti cetaso ābhogo, etenetaṃ oḷārikaṃ akkhāyatī'ti (dī. ni. 1.96) evaṃ vuttassa sukhassa oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā"ti ca tattha dosaṃ disvā catutthaṃ jhānaṃ santato manasikatvā tatiyajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya catutthādhigamāya yogo kātabbo. Athassa yadā tatiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya satassa sampajānassa jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhato cetasikasomanassasaṅkhātaṃ sukhaṃ oḷārikato upaṭṭhāti, upekkhāvedanā ceva cittekaggatā ca santato upaṭṭhāti, tadāssa oḷārikaṅgappahānāya santaaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ "pathavī pathavī"ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto "idāni catutthaṃ jhānaṃ uppajjissatī"ti bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā tadeva pathavīkasiṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ uppajjati. Tato tasmiṃyevārammaṇe cattāri pañca vā javanāni uppajjanti, yesaṃ avasāne ekaṃ rūpāvacaraṃ catutthajjhānikaṃ, sesāni vuttappakārāneva kāmāvacarāni. Ayaṃ pana viseso, yasmā sukhavedanā adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya āsevanapaccayena paccayo na hoti, catutthajjhāne ca adukkhamasukhāya vedanāya uppajjitabbaṃ, tasmā tāni upekkhāvedanāsampayuttāni honti. Upekkhāsampayuttattāyeva cettha pītipi parihāyatīti. Ettāvatā cesa sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānā pubbeva somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamā adukkhamasukhaṃ upekkhāsatipārisuddhiṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati (dī. ni. 1.232; dha. sa. 165). Evamanena ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgataṃ tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannaṃ catutthaṃ jhānaṃ adhigataṃ hoti pathavīkasiṇaṃ.

Ru-Yi Translation

Having thus attained the third jhāna, in that too, by the method already stated, having become one who has practiced the five kinds of mastery, and emerging from the third jhāna made familiar, and having seen the danger there — "this attainment has joy as its near enemy, and its factors are weak owing to the grossness of the happiness called, in the passage 'that mental engagement with it as happiness — by this it is declared to be gross' (D.N. 1.96), gross" — and having brought to mind the fourth jhāna as peaceful, effort should be made for the attainment of the fourth by exhausting the relish for the third jhāna. Then, when — emerging from the third jhāna, mindful and fully aware, reviewing the jhāna factors — the happiness reckoned as mental gladness appears to him as gross, while equanimous feeling and unification appear as peaceful, then, for the abandoning of the gross factor and the acquiring of the peaceful factor, as he brings that very sign repeatedly to mind, thinking "earth, earth," thinking "now the fourth jhāna will arise," the life-continuum is interrupted and a mind-door adverting-consciousness arises taking that very earth kasiṇa as its object. Then, in that same object, four or five impulsion-consciousnesses arise, at the end of which one belongs to the fine-material sphere, of the fourth jhāna; the rest are of the sense sphere, of the kind already stated. But there is this distinction: because pleasant feeling does not serve as a condition, by way of repetition, for neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling, and because neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling must arise in the fourth jhāna, these [impulsions] are therefore associated with equanimous feeling. And precisely because they are associated with equanimity, joy too disappears here. By this much, he dwells, with the abandoning of pleasure and the abandoning of pain, with the earlier passing away of both gladness and grief, in the neither-painful-nor-pleasant state that is purity of mindfulness through equanimity — he enters upon and dwells in the fourth jhāna (D.N. 1.232; Dhs. 165). Thus is attained by him the fourth jhāna on the earth kasiṇa, which has abandoned one factor, is possessed of two factors, is good in three ways, and endowed with the ten characteristics.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The technical explanation for why joy disappears at the fourth jhāna — rather than simply being asserted as an observed fact — is a small but telling piece of Abhidhamma causal reasoning: pleasant feeling cannot serve as a repetition-condition (āsevana-paccaya) for neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling, since the two are simply different in kind; and since the fourth jhāna's defining feeling must be neither-painful-nor-pleasant, its accompanying consciousness is necessarily associated with equanimous feeling rather than joy, which requires pleasant feeling as its own condition. Joy's disappearance is thus presented as a structural consequence of what kind of feeling the fourth jhāna's javanas require, not as a separately willed abandonment.

The factor arithmetic reaches its final form here: like the third jhāna, the fourth is described as "abandoned one, possessed of two" — but the one factor now given up is happiness rather than joy, and the two retained are (as the next section will clarify) equanimous feeling and unification of mind, with the newly prominent quality of "purity of mindfulness through equanimity" giving the jhāna its own distinctive name, to be unpacked in the sections that follow.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
cetaso ābhoga

mental engagement, mental attending — ābhoga (bending toward, engaging with); the specific quality of happiness the Dīgha Nikāya names as what makes it "gross" relative to the fourth jhāna's equanimous feeling.

āsevanapaccaya

the repetition-condition — āsevana (repeated practice, cultivation) + paccaya (condition); one of the twenty-four conditions of the Paṭṭhāna, invoked here to explain why pleasant feeling cannot give rise to neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling in immediate succession.

adukkhamasukha

neither painful nor pleasant — the feeling that defines the fourth jhāna, replacing the happiness of the third; the subject of a dedicated word-commentary later in this same treatment.

Abandoning Pleasure and Pain

The word-commentary on "with the abandoning of pleasure and pain, with the earlier passing away of gladness and grief" resolves an apparent contradiction: a canonical passage seems to locate the actual cessation of these four feelings at each of the four jhānas themselves, yet this section shows they are truly abandoned already at each jhāna's own access-moment, with the jhāna-citation naming only their utter, complete cessation — illustrated by the famous simile of a herdsman gathering every cow into one pen simply in order to correctly pick out a single ox.

Pali Source

Tattha sukhassa ca pahānā dukkhassa ca pahānāti kāyikasukhassa ca kāyikadukkhassa ca pahānā. Pubbevāti tañca kho pubbeva, na catutthajjhānakkhaṇe. Somanassadomanassānaṃ atthaṅgamāti cetasikasukhassa ca cetasikadukkhassa cāti imesampi dvinnaṃ pubbeva atthaṅgamā, pahānā icceva vuttaṃ hoti.

Kadā pana nesaṃ pahānaṃ hotīti. Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇe. Somanassañhi catutthajjhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyati. Dukkhadomanassasukhāni paṭhamadutiyatatiyajjhānānaṃ upacārakkhaṇesu. Evametesaṃ pahānakkamena avuttānampi indriyavibhaṅge pana indriyānaṃ uddesakkameneva idhāpi vuttānaṃ sukhadukkhasomanassadomanassānaṃ pahānaṃ veditabbaṃ.

Yadi panetāni tassa tassa jhānassa upacārakkhaṇeyeva pahīyanti, atha kasmā "kattha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati, idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehipi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ettha cuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati. Kattha cuppannaṃ domanassindriyaṃ sukhindriyaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhati, idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ettha cuppannaṃ somanassindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatī"ti (saṃ. ni. 5.510) evaṃ jhānesveva nirodho vuttoti? Atisayanirodhattā. Atisayanirodho hi nesaṃ paṭhamajjhānādīsu, na nirodhoyeva. Nirodhoyeva pana upacārakkhaṇe, nātisayanirodho.

Tathā hi nānāvajjane paṭhamajjhānupacāre niruddhassāpi dukkhindriyassa ḍaṃsamakasādisamphassena vā visamāsanupatāpena vā siyā uppatti, na tveva antoappanāyaṃ. Upacāre vā niruddhampetaṃ na suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti, paṭipakkhena avihatattā. Antoappanāyaṃ pana pītipharaṇena sabbo kāyo sukhokkanto hoti, sukhokkantakāyassa ca suṭṭhu niruddhaṃ hoti dukkhindriyaṃ, paṭipakkhena vihatattā. Nānāvajjaneyeva ca dutiyajjhānupacāre pahīnassa domanassindriyassa yasmā etaṃ vitakkavicārapaccayepi kāyakilamathe cittupaghāte ca sati uppajjati. Vitakkavicārābhāve ca neva uppajjati. Yattha pana uppajjati, tattha vitakkavicārabhāve, appahīnā eva ca dutiyajjhānupacāre vitakkavicārāti tatthassa siyā uppatti, na tveva dutiyajjhāne, pahīnapaccayattā. Tathā tatiyajjhānupacāre pahīnassāpi sukhindriyassa pītisamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭakāyassa siyā uppatti, na tveva tatiyajjhāne. Tatiyajjhāne hi sukhassa paccayabhūtā pīti sabbaso niruddhāti. Tathā catutthajjhānupacāre pahīnassāpi somanassindriyassa āsannattā appanāppattāya upekkhāya abhāvena sammā anatikkantattā ca siyā uppatti, na tveva catutthajjhāne. Tasmā eva ca etthuppannaṃ dukkhindriyaṃ aparisesaṃ nirujjhatīti tattha tattha aparisesaggahaṇaṃ katanti.

Etthāha "athevaṃ tassa tassa jhānassupacāre pahīnāpi etā vedanā idha kasmā samāhaṭā"ti? Sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ. Yā hi ayaṃ adukkhamasukhanti ettha adukkhamasukhā vedanā vuttā, sā sukhumā duviññeyyā na sakkā sukhena gahetuṃ, tasmā yathā nāma duṭṭhassa yathā vā tathā vā upasaṅkamitvā gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa goṇassa sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ gopo ekasmiṃ vaje sabbā gāvo samāharati, athekekaṃ nīharanto paṭipāṭiyā āgataṃ "ayaṃ so gaṇhatha na"nti tampi gāhayati, evameva bhagavā sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ sabbā etā samāhari. Evañhi samāhaṭā etā dassetvā yaṃ neva sukhaṃ na dukkhaṃ na somanassaṃ na domanassaṃ, ayaṃ adukkhamasukhā vedanāti sakkā hoti esā gāhayituṃ.

Apica adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā paccayadassanatthañcāpi etā vuttāti veditabbā. Dukkhappahānādayo hi tassā paccayā. Yathāha – "cattāro kho, āvuso, paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā. Idhāvuso, bhikkhu sukhassa ca pahānā…pe… catutthaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati. Ime khvāvuso, cattāro paccayā adukkhamasukhāya cetovimuttiyā samāpattiyā"ti (ma. ni. 1.458).

Yathā vā aññattha pahīnāpi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo tatiyamaggassa vaṇṇabhaṇanatthaṃ tattha pahīnāti vuttā, evaṃ vaṇṇabhaṇanatthampetassa jhānassetā idha vuttātipi veditabbā.

Paccayaghātena vā ettha rāgadosānamatidūrabhāvaṃ dassetumpetā vuttāti veditabbā. Etāsu hi sukhaṃ somanassassa paccayo, somanassaṃ rāgassa. Dukkhaṃ domanassassa paccayo, domanassaṃ dosassa. Sukhādighātena cassa sappaccayā rāgadosā hatāti atidūre hontīti.

Adukkhamasukhanti dukkhābhāvena adukkhaṃ. Sukhābhāvena asukhaṃ. Etenettha dukkhasukhapaṭipakkhabhūtaṃ tatiyavedanaṃ dīpeti, na dukkhasukhābhāvamattaṃ. Tatiyavedanā nāma adukkhamasukhā, upekkhātipi vuccati. Sā iṭṭhāniṭṭhaviparītānubhavanalakkhaṇā, majjhattarasā, avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhānā, sukhadukkhanirodhapadaṭṭhānāti veditabbā.

Ru-Yi Translation

Herein, "with the abandoning of pleasure and the abandoning of pain": with the abandoning of bodily pleasure and bodily pain. "Earlier": that is, earlier still — not at the moment of the fourth jhāna itself. "With the earlier passing away of gladness and grief": that is, with the earlier passing away of these two as well, namely mental pleasure and mental pain — this is said meaning their abandoning.

But when does their abandoning actually occur? At the moment of access to each of the four jhānas. For mental gladness is abandoned already at the moment of access to the fourth jhāna. Pain, grief, and [bodily] pleasure are abandoned at the moments of access to the first, second, and third jhānas respectively. Thus, although not stated here in this order of abandoning, the abandoning of pleasure, pain, gladness, and grief, stated here in the same order as their listing in the Indriya-vibhaṅga, should be understood accordingly.

But if these are abandoned already at the moment of access to each respective jhāna, then why is it said, "where does the arisen pain faculty cease without remainder? Here, monks, a monk, quite secluded from sense pleasures, ... enters upon and dwells in the first jhāna. Here the arisen pain faculty ceases without remainder. Where do the arisen grief faculty, pleasure faculty, and gladness faculty cease without remainder? Here, monks, a monk, with the abandoning of pleasure, ... enters upon and dwells in the fourth jhāna; here the arisen gladness faculty ceases without remainder" (S.N. 5.510) — thus speaking of the cessation as occurring precisely at the jhānas themselves? Because of their utter cessation. For in the first jhāna and the rest, it is their utter cessation, not their mere cessation, [that occurs there]. Mere cessation occurs already at the moment of access; it is not their utter cessation.

For thus: even though the pain faculty has already ceased at the moment of access to the first jhāna, when attention is diverted elsewhere, it could still arise through contact with a gadfly, mosquito, or the like, or through discomfort from an uneven sitting-posture — but not within the absorption itself. Or, even though it has ceased at access, it has not thoroughly ceased there, since it has not been struck down by its opposite. But within the absorption, the whole body is pervaded by joy and steeped in happiness; and for a body so steeped in happiness, the pain faculty thoroughly ceases, since it has been struck down by its opposite. Likewise, even though the grief faculty is abandoned at the moment of access to the second jhāna, since this can arise, even when caused by applied and sustained thought, whenever there is bodily fatigue or mental affliction — and it does not arise at all in the absence of applied and sustained thought — yet where it does arise, it is where applied and sustained thought are present; and since applied and sustained thought are not yet abandoned at the access to the second jhāna, it could arise there; but not in the second jhāna itself, since its condition has been abandoned. Likewise, even though the pleasure faculty is abandoned at the access to the third jhāna, it could still arise in a body pervaded by the refined matter originating from joy — but not in the third jhāna itself, for in the third jhāna, the joy that is the condition for that pleasure has utterly ceased. Likewise, even though the gladness faculty is abandoned at the access to the fourth jhāna, it could still arise, on account of its nearness, through the absence of the equanimity that has not yet reached absorption and has therefore not been properly transcended — but not in the fourth jhāna itself. It is for this very reason that, in each respective case, the word "without remainder" is used: "here the arisen pain faculty ceases without remainder."

Here it may be asked: "if these feelings are already abandoned at the access to each respective jhāna, then why are they all gathered together and mentioned here?" For the purpose of grasping [the fourth jhāna's own] pleasant-feeling classification. For this feeling here called "neither-painful-nor-pleasant" is subtle, hard to recognize, and cannot be grasped easily. Therefore, just as, in order to correctly pick out a vicious ox — one that cannot be approached and seized in the ordinary way — a herdsman gathers all the cows together into a single pen, and then, drawing them out one by one in sequence, has [an assistant] identify each, saying "is this the one, take it, or not" — just so the Blessed One gathered all these feelings together for the purpose of correctly grasping [the fourth jhāna's feeling]. For, having shown them thus gathered together, it becomes possible to make it understood: "that which is neither pleasure, nor pain, nor gladness, nor grief — this is the neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling."

Moreover, it should be understood that these were also stated for the purpose of showing the conditions for the equanimous deliverance of mind that is neither-painful-nor-pleasant. For the abandoning of pain and the rest are its conditions. As it is said: "there are, friend, four conditions for the attainment of the equanimous deliverance of mind that is neither-painful-nor-pleasant. Herein, friend, a monk, with the abandoning of pleasure, ... enters upon and dwells in the fourth jhāna. These, friend, are the four conditions for the attainment of the equanimous deliverance of mind that is neither-painful-nor-pleasant" (M.N. 1.458).

Or else, just as, elsewhere, views of self-identity and the rest, though [already] abandoned, are said to be "abandoned" at the third path for the purpose of praising that path, so too it should be understood that these are stated here for the purpose of praising this jhāna.

Or else, it should be understood that these are stated here in order to show, through the destruction of their conditions, how far removed greed and hatred now are. For, among these, pleasure is the condition for gladness, and gladness for greed; pain is the condition for grief, and grief for hatred. And through the destruction of pleasure and the rest, greed and hatred, along with their conditions, are destroyed, and so become utterly remote.

"Neither painful nor pleasant": through the absence of pain, "neither painful"; through the absence of pleasure, "nor pleasant." By this, a third feeling is indicated, one that is the direct opposite of both pain and pleasure — not merely the bare absence of pain and pleasure. This third feeling, called "neither-painful-nor-pleasant," is also called equanimity. It should be understood as having the characteristic of experiencing what is contrary to the desirable and the undesirable, the function of neutrality, the manifestation of being unevident, and its proximate cause is the cessation of pleasure and pain.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The distinction between mere cessation (nirodha) and utter cessation (atisaya-nirodha) resolves what would otherwise be a real contradiction between two canonical statements — one locating the abandonment of pleasure and pain at access to each jhāna, the other locating it at the jhānas themselves. The chapter's solution is characteristically precise: a hindrance-type feeling can cease at access in the sense of no longer being actively present, while remaining capable of re-arising under provocation (a mosquito bite, an uneven seat) because its opposing factor has not yet fully "struck it down." Only within full absorption is the opposing factor strong enough to prevent any possible re-arising at all — this, and not the initial cessation, is what the canonical passage on the four jhānas is describing.

The herdsman-and-vicious-ox simile is one of the chapter's more vivid images for a point of pure epistemology: the fourth jhāna's neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling is defined not by direct positive description but by systematic elimination — gathering every recognizable feeling into view precisely so that whatever remains, once all four familiar feelings have been ruled out one by one, can be identified by process of exclusion. The four feelings are named in the formula not because all four are present in the fourth jhāna, but because naming and ruling out each one is the only way to make a genuinely subtle, otherwise indescribable feeling identifiable at all.

The final three explanations offered for why all four feelings are listed — for grasping the fourth feeling by exclusion, for showing the conditions of equanimous deliverance, for praising the jhāna (paralleling the third path's "abandoning of the five lower fetters" already invoked for the third jhāna), and for showing the destruction of greed and hatred's supporting conditions — are presented side by side without forcing a single choice among them, in the same non-exclusive manner the chapter has already used for equanimity's dual etymology and the ambiguous grammatical construal of "with the fading of joy."

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
atisayanirodha

utter, superlative cessation — atisaya (surpassing, excelling) + nirodha (cessation); the technical distinction from mere nirodha that resolves the apparent conflict between two canonical descriptions of when a feeling is actually abandoned.

indriyavibhaṅga

the Analysis of the Faculties — a division of the Vibhaṅga (part of the Abhidhamma Piṭaka) whose listing-order for the feeling-faculties is what determines the order pain, grief, pleasure, and gladness are named in here, rather than their actual sequence of abandonment.

adukkhamasukhā vedanā

neither-painful-nor-pleasant feeling — the fourth jhāna's defining feeling, identified here as a positive third reality directly opposed to both pleasure and pain, not merely their shared absence; also called upekkhā (equanimity) as a feeling.

avibhūtapaccupaṭṭhāna

manifesting as unevident — avibhūta (not manifest, indistinct) + paccupaṭṭhāna (manifestation); part of the fourth-feeling's own characteristic-function-manifestation-proximate cause definition, capturing exactly why it must be identified by exclusion rather than direct experience.

Purity of Mindfulness Through Equanimity

The word-commentary on the fourth jhāna closes by explaining its distinctive epithet, "purity of mindfulness through equanimity" — using the beautiful image of a moon's crescent whose light is obscured by day not through any fault of its own but through the sun's overpowering brilliance, becoming visible only once that overpowering brilliance is gone — before closing with the fourth jhāna's own factor-count and numbering, which completes the fourfold scheme.

Pali Source

Upekkhāsatipārisuddhinti upekkhāya janitasatiyā pārisuddhiṃ. Imasmiñhi jhāne suparisuddhā sati, yā ca tassā satiyā pārisuddhi, sā upekkhāya katā, na aññena. Tasmā etaṃ "upekkhāsatipārisuddhi"nti vuccati. Vibhaṅgepi vuttaṃ "ayaṃ sati imāya upekkhāya visadā hoti parisuddhā pariyodātā. Tena vuccati upekkhāsatipārisuddhī"ti (vibha. 597). Yāya ca upekkhāya ettha satiyā pārisuddhi hoti, sā atthato tatramajjhattatātiveditabbā. Na kevalañcettha tāya satiyeva parisuddhā, apica kho sabbepi sampayuttadhammā, satisīsena pana desanā vuttā.

Tattha kiñcāpi ayaṃ upekkhā heṭṭhāpi tīsu jhānesu vijjati. Yathā pana divā sūriyappabhābhibhavā sommabhāvena ca attano upakārakattena vā sabhāgāya rattiyā alābhā divā vijjamānāpi candalekhā aparisuddhā hoti apariyodātā, evamayampi tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā appaṭilābhā vijjamānāpi paṭhamādijjhānabhedesu aparisuddhā hoti. Tassā ca aparisuddhāya divā aparisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo aparisuddhāva honti. Tasmā tesu ekampi "upekkhāsatipārisuddhi"nti na vuttaṃ. Idha pana vitakkādipaccanīkadhammatejābhibhavābhāvā sabhāgāya ca upekkhāvedanārattiyā paṭilābhā ayaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhācandalekhā ativiya parisuddhā. Tassā parisuddhattā parisuddhacandalekhāya pabhā viya sahajātāpi satiādayo parisuddhā honti pariyodātā. Tasmā idameva "upekkhāsatipārisuddhi"nti vuttanti veditabbaṃ.

Catutthanti gaṇanānupubbatā catutthaṃ. Idaṃ catutthaṃ samāpajjatītipi catutthaṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ "ekaṅgavippahīnaṃ duvaṅgasamannāgata"nti, tattha somanassassa pahānavasena ekaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Tañca pana somanassaṃ ekavīthiyaṃ purimajavanesuyeva pahīyati. Tenassa taṃ pahānaṅganti vuccati. Upekkhāvedanā cittassekaggatāti imesaṃ pana dvinnaṃ uppattivasena duvaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Sesaṃ paṭhamajjhāne vuttanayameva. Esa tāva catukkajjhāne nayo.

Ru-Yi Translation

"Purity of mindfulness through equanimity": the purity of mindfulness generated by equanimity. For in this jhāna, mindfulness is thoroughly pure; and whatever purity that mindfulness has, it is brought about by equanimity, not by anything else. Therefore this is called "purity of mindfulness through equanimity." It is also said in the Vibhaṅga: "this mindfulness, through this equanimity, becomes clear, pure, bright. By this it is called purity of mindfulness through equanimity" (Vibh. 597). And the equanimity through which mindfulness's purity comes about here should be understood, in point of meaning, as neutrality of mind. And it is not that mindfulness alone is purified by it here — rather, all the associated states are — but the teaching is expressed under the heading of mindfulness.

Herein, although this equanimity exists in the three lower jhānas too, nevertheless — just as, by day, a crescent moon, though it exists, is not pure, is not bright, on account of being overpowered by the sun's brightness, and, through its own gentle nature, or through its being of service [chiefly at night], it does not obtain the night that is its proper sphere — just so, this crescent-moon of equanimity-of-neutrality-of-mind, though it exists in the divisions of the first jhāna and the rest, is not pure there, being overpowered by the fire of opposing states such as applied thought, and not obtaining the night, so to speak, of equanimous feeling that is its own proper sphere. And, that equanimity being impure, the mindfulness and the rest that arise together with it, like the light of an impure crescent moon by day, are likewise impure. For this reason, not even one of those [three lower jhānas] is called "purity of mindfulness through equanimity." But here, through the absence of being overpowered by the fire of opposing states such as applied thought, and through obtaining the night, so to speak, of equanimous feeling that is its own proper sphere, this crescent-moon of equanimity-of-neutrality-of-mind is exceedingly pure. And, that equanimity being pure, the mindfulness and the rest that arise together with it, like the light of a pure crescent moon, become pure and bright. Therefore it should be understood that it is this fourth jhāna alone that is called "purity of mindfulness through equanimity."

"Fourth": fourth by numerical order; or it is "fourth" also in the sense that this is the fourth attainment entered upon. Now, as to what was said, "having abandoned one factor, possessed of two factors" — herein, the state of having abandoned one factor should be understood by way of the abandoning of gladness. And that gladness is abandoned already in the preceding impulsions of a single cognitive process; for this reason it is called its "abandoned factor." As for equanimous feeling and unification of mind — the state of being possessed of two factors should be understood by way of the arising of these two. The rest is as already stated for the first jhāna. This, then, is the method for the fourfold scheme of the jhānas.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The crescent-moon simile is one of the chapter's most elegant images precisely because of how exactly its two halves map onto the doctrinal point being made. A daytime crescent moon is not defective — its own light is completely intact — but is rendered invisible by a more overpowering brilliance (the sun) sharing the same sky, and it recovers its brightness not by acquiring anything new but simply by finally reaching a sky (night) where that overpowering rival is absent. Equanimity in the first three jhānas is exactly this: not deficient in itself, but perpetually outshone by applied thought, sustained thought, or joy, each of which "shares the sky" with it in those lower attainments. Only in the fourth jhāna does equanimity finally reach the "night" that is its own proper domain, free of any brighter rival, and only then does its own inherent purity — and the purity of the mindfulness that shares in it — finally become visible.

This closes the treatise's dedicated treatment of why each of the two named epithets across all four jhānas ("confidence and unification of mind" at the second, "equanimous" at the third, "purity of mindfulness through equanimity" at the fourth) is introduced exactly when it is: in every case the underlying quality was already present at an earlier jhāna, and in every case the delay in naming it is explained not by the quality's absence but by some specific factor that had been obscuring or overpowering it until that point. The consistency of this explanatory pattern across three separate cases is itself a marker of how tightly reasoned this whole section of the chapter is.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
candalekhā

a crescent moon — canda (moon) + lekhā (a line, streak); the central image of this section's simile, its light present but invisible by day, exactly as equanimity is present but impure in the first three jhānas.

paccanīkadhammatejābhibhava

being overpowered by the fire of opposing states — paccanīka (opposing) + dhamma (state) + teja (fire, brilliance) + abhibhava (overpowering); the technical cause of equanimity's impurity in the lower jhānas, paralleling the sun's overpowering of the moon's light by day.

visada / pariyodāta

clear / bright, cleansed — a pair of near-synonyms from the Vibhaṅga's own definition, describing exactly what happens to mindfulness once equanimity of neutrality of mind reaches the fourth jhāna's undisturbed purity.

The Fivefold Method: A Fifth Jhāna

Having completed the fourfold scheme, the chapter closes its treatment of the jhānas by giving the alternative fivefold method found in the Abhidhamma — in which what the fourfold scheme calls simply "the second jhāna" is itself divided into two separate jhānas, one abandoning applied thought alone while sustained thought remains, the other abandoning both together, so that the fourfold scheme's second and third jhānas become the fivefold scheme's second, third, and fourth, while its own fourth and fifth simply correspond to the fourfold scheme's third and fourth under new numbers.

Pali Source

Pañcakajjhānaṃ pana nibbattentena paguṇapaṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya "ayaṃ samāpatti āsannanīvaraṇapaccatthikā, vitakkassa oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā"ti ca tattha dosaṃ disvā dutiyajjhānaṃ santato manasikaritvā paṭhamajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya dutiyādhigamāya yogo kātabbo. Athassa yadā paṭhamajjhānā vuṭṭhāya satassa sampajānassa jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhato vitakkamattaṃ oḷārikato upaṭṭhāti, vicārādayo santato. Tadāssa oḷārikaṅgappahānāya santaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ "pathavī pathavī"ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto vuttanayeneva dutiyajjhānaṃ uppajjati. Tassa vitakkamattameva pahānaṅgaṃ. Vicārādīni cattāri samannāgataṅgāni. Sesaṃ vuttappakārameva.

Evamadhigate pana tasmimpi vuttanayeneva pañcahākārehi ciṇṇavasinā hutvā paguṇadutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya "ayaṃ samāpatti āsannavitakkapaccatthikā, vicārassa oḷārikattā aṅgadubbalā"ti ca tattha dosaṃ disvā tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ santato manasikaritvā dutiyajjhāne nikantiṃ pariyādāya tatiyādhigamāya yogo kātabbo. Athassa yadā dutiyajjhānato vuṭṭhāya satassa sampajānassa jhānaṅgāni paccavekkhato vicāramattaṃ oḷārikato upaṭṭhāti, pītiādīni santato. Tadāssa oḷārikaṅgappahānāya santaṅgapaṭilābhāya ca tadeva nimittaṃ "pathavī pathavī"ti punappunaṃ manasikaroto vuttanayeneva tatiyaṃ jhānaṃ uppajjati. Tassa vicāramattameva pahānaṅgaṃ catukkanayassa dutiyajjhāne viya pītiādīni tīṇi samannāgataṅgāni. Sesaṃ vuttappakārameva.

Iti yaṃ catukkanaye dutiyaṃ, taṃ dvidhā bhinditvā pañcakanaye dutiyañceva tatiyañca hoti. Yāni ca tattha tatiyacatutthāni, tāni ca catutthapañcamāni honti. Paṭhamaṃ paṭhamamevāti.

Iti sādhujanapāmojjatthāya kate visuddhimagge
Samādhibhāvanādhikāre
Pathavīkasiṇaniddeso nāma
Catuttho paricchedo.

Ru-Yi Translation

But for one bringing about the fivefold scheme's jhānas, having emerged from the first jhāna made familiar, and having seen the danger there — "this attainment has the hindrances as its near enemies, and its factors are weak owing to the grossness of applied thought" — and having brought to mind the second jhāna as peaceful, effort should be made for the attainment of the second by exhausting the relish for the first jhāna. Then, when — emerging from the first jhāna, mindful and fully aware, reviewing the jhāna factors — applied thought alone appears to him as gross, while sustained thought and the rest appear as peaceful, then, for the abandoning of the gross factor and the acquiring of the peaceful factor, as he brings that very sign repeatedly to mind, thinking "earth, earth," the second jhāna arises in the way already stated. For it, applied thought alone is the abandoned factor; sustained thought and the remaining three are its possessed factors. The rest is exactly as already stated.

Having thus attained this, in that too, by the method already stated, having become one who has practiced the five kinds of mastery, and emerging from the second jhāna made familiar, and having seen the danger there — "this attainment has applied thought as its near enemy, and its factors are weak owing to the grossness of sustained thought" — and having brought to mind the third jhāna as peaceful, effort should be made for the attainment of the third by exhausting the relish for the second jhāna. Then, when — emerging from the second jhāna, mindful and fully aware, reviewing the jhāna factors — sustained thought alone appears to him as gross, while joy and the rest appear as peaceful, then, for the abandoning of the gross factor and the acquiring of the peaceful factor, as he brings that very sign repeatedly to mind, thinking "earth, earth," the third jhāna arises in the way already stated. For it, sustained thought alone is the abandoned factor; joy and the remaining two are, as in the fourfold scheme's second jhāna, its three possessed factors. The rest is exactly as already stated.

Thus, what is the second jhāna in the fourfold scheme, divided into two, becomes the second and third jhānas in the fivefold scheme. And what are the third and fourth jhānas there [in the fourfold scheme] become the fourth and fifth. The first remains simply the first.

Thus, in the Visuddhimagga, composed for the gladdening of good people, in the section on the development of concentration, this is the fourth chapter, called the Description of the Earth Kasiṇa.

Reading note — Ru-Yi

The fivefold scheme is not a rival account of meditative attainment but a more fine-grained lens applied to the very same territory the fourfold scheme has just finished mapping: it isolates applied thought and sustained thought as two separable objects of abandonment rather than treating their stilling as a single joint event, producing an intermediate jhāna (abandoning applied thought only, still with sustained thought present) that the fourfold scheme's coarser resolution simply does not register as a distinct stage. This is the Abhidhamma's characteristic move of finding a more granular partition within a phenomenon the Suttanta's own exposition had already treated as settled — not a disagreement about what happens in meditation, but a difference in how finely the same continuous process is sliced for the purpose of analysis.

The chapter's closing correspondence table — fourfold second becomes fivefold second-and-third, fourfold third-and-fourth become fivefold fourth-and-fifth, fourfold first stays fivefold first — is stated with a brevity that assumes the reader has just fully absorbed both schemes' formulas; it functions as a compact key for translating between the two numbering systems used throughout the rest of the Abhidhamma literature, where the fivefold scheme is in fact the more standard reference point.

The colophon closes chapter four exactly as the three preceding chapters closed — "composed for the gladdening of good people," within "the section on the development of concentration" — but this chapter's closing carries a weight the earlier three did not: unlike Sīlaniddesa and Dhutaṅganiddesa, which together completed the treatise's entire first section on virtue, and unlike Kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇaniddesa, which was only a general orientation to the forty meditation subjects as a whole, Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa has just laid out, in full and exhaustive detail, the entire mechanics of actually developing jhāna through a single worked example. Every one of the thirty-nine remaining meditation subjects, in every chapter still to come, will build directly on the vocabulary, the procedures, and the similes established here, invoking this chapter by cross-reference rather than repeating it — exactly as the chapter's own internal method, saving time by saying "of the kind already stated" once a mechanism was established, has been showing all along.

Key vocabulary — for Pāli learners
pañcakajjhāna / catukkajjhāna

the fivefold jhāna scheme / the fourfold jhāna scheme — pañcaka (group of five) and catukka (group of four) + jhāna; the two standard Abhidhamma methods of counting the jhānas, differing only in whether applied and sustained thought are abandoned together or in two separate stages.

vitakkamatta

applied thought alone — vitakka + matta (mere, only); the single factor abandoned to reach the fivefold scheme's second jhāna, as distinct from the fourfold scheme's second jhāna, which abandons both applied and sustained thought together.

sādhujanapāmojjattha

for the gladdening of good people — sādhujana (good people) + pāmojja (gladness) + attha (purpose); the treatise's own stated purpose, named identically in the closing colophon of every chapter completed so far.

Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa Complete

This closes the translation of the Visuddhimagga's fourth chapter, Pathavīkasiṇaniddesa ("The Description of the Earth Kasiṇa"), from the Pāli — the treatise's foundational how-to chapter for actually developing concentration, all of whose method later chapters on the remaining thirty-nine meditation subjects will invoke by cross-reference rather than repeat. In full: the eighteen faults of an unsuitable dwelling and the five-factor formula for a suitable one; cutting off minor impediments; the complete procedure for making the earth kasiṇa disc and developing it through the counterpart-sign to access and absorption concentration; the sevenfold suitable and unsuitable; the full tenfold skill in absorption with its Bojjhaṅga Saṃyutta citations; the five similes for evenly-balanced effort; the moment of absorption and the complete word-by-word commentary on the first jhāna's formula, its five factors abandoned and five possessed, its threefold goodness and ten characteristics, achieving lasting duration, expanding the sign by careful degrees, and the five kinds of mastery; the second jhāna in full, with its confidence-and-unification word-commentary; the third jhāna in full, including the chapter's extensive ten-kinds-of-equanimity analysis; the fourth jhāna in full, including its detailed resolution of when the four feelings are truly abandoned and its crescent-moon simile for purity of mindfulness through equanimity; and finally the Abhidhamma's alternative fivefold jhāna scheme — closing, like the three chapters before it, with the traditional colophon. The Visuddhimagga's fifth chapter, treating the remaining kasiṇas, continues from here — the next major undertaking for this translation.